Home

TNC 640 Zyklen (SW 340 59x01) en

image

Contents

1. m x D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 G419 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 419 measures any coordinate in any axis and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table SE TURTCHPROBE TI 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the programmed starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the programmed probing direction 2 hen the touch probe moves to the programmed measuring height and measures the actual position with a simple probing movement 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis If you use Cycle 419 several times in succession to save the datum in more than one axis in the preset table you must activate the preset number last written to by Cycle 419 after every execution of Cycle 419 this is not required if you overwrite the active preset 5 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle
2. The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of the entire pattern LLI E a Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the Example NC blocks Eee starting point of the frame in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the frame in the Y axis INITION Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value Manual operation o Programming A g Programmin Spacing of machining positions Y incremental aes Distance between the machining positions in the Y ariana emant an direction You can enter a positive or negative value spy E BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 200 Z 0 OoL c Z 2000 L 24100 RO FMAX M3 PA F R 1 ATTERN DEF FRAME END PGM PAT MM Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle ad of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated i around the entered starting point Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value 2 2 Pattern Def Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the principal axis of the machining plane is n distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can ente
3. K Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates Lud A between right hand and left hand threads Z right hand thread Sums left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 So gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute O Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range i 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 O gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft key If you press MANUAL OPERATION you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis direction button of the active spindle axis 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a Floating HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 9 G209 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Mso 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 DIN ISO G209 Cycle run The TNC machines the thread in several passes until it reaches the programmed depth You can define in a parameter whether the tool is to be retracted completely from the hole for chip breaking 1 The TNC positions the tool in the tool axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface There it carries out an oriented spindle stop 2 The tool moves to the programmed inf
4. Log function After running Cycle 451 the TNC creates a measuring log TCHPR451 TXT containing the following information Creation date and time of the log Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run Mode used O Check 1 Optimize position 2 Optimize pose Active kinematic number Entered calibration sphere radius For each measured rotary axis Starting angle End angle Angle of incidence Number of measuring points Dispersion standard deviation Maximum error Angular error Averaged backlash Averaged positioning error Measuring circle radius Compensation values in all axes preset shift Evaluation of measuring points HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G451 Option a MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO i il G451 Option P MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 526 Notes on log data Error outputs In the Test mode Q406 0 the TNC outputs the accuracy that can be attained by optimization and or the accuracies attained through optimization Mode 1 If the angular position of a rotary axis was calculated the measured data is also shown in the log Dispersion standard deviation In the log dispersion a term from statistics is used as a measure of accuracy Measured dispersion measured standard deviation means that 68 3 of the actually measured spatial errors are within the specified range Optimized dispersion optimized standard deviation means that 68 3 of the spatial errors to be ex
5. The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M E Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call E Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the spindle axis such coordinates are ignored E The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram Characteristics of the fixed cycles E The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set up clearance before a cycle E Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them E The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies to the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles E The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing E For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for spindle axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane E The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and set up clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 224 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il Entering a simple contour formula You can use soft keys
6. DIN ISO G253 Cycle run Use Cycle 253 to completely machine a slot Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 Starting trom the left slot arc center the tool moves in a reciprocating motion at the plunging angle defined in the tool table to the first infeed depth Specify the plunging strategy with parameter Q366 2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out taking the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 This process is repeated until the slot depth is reached Finishing 4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the slot walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The slot side is approached tangentially in the right slot arc 5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside out The slot floor is approached tangentially 138 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation R0 Note parameter Q367 slot position The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the to
7. HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 po D lt O za e o A a ian RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 o i CESSING CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 13 1 13 18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 Application This cycle enables you to radially cut in slots of any form You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the contour the cycle runs outside machining If the contour starting point is less than the end point the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the Z coordinate first cut in position 2 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 3 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in a radial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the slot form is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point 336 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC f
8. New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the bolt hole center Default setting O Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 03372 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the bolt hole center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G416 oo CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO K il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe poin
9. Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the diameter of the hole Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 SE TUPRMCHEROBE TR Q273 9279 G421 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO j il G421 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO 468 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring
10. Q263 O Z65 G400 Q272 1 E BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO i il G400 B BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points gt Preset value for rotation angle Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Preset number in table Q305 Enter the preset number in the table in which the TNC is to save the determined basic rotation If you enter OQ305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode Input range 0 to 2999 m X D 3 pei D O za e zA A 382 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 15 3 BASIC ROTATION from Two Holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO G401 Cycle run The Touch Probe Cycle 401 measures the centers of two holes Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in the working plane and the line connecting the hole centers With the basic rotation function the TNC
11. Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR431 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G431 Example NC blocks 17 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO K i 17 14 Programming Examples Program sequence E Roughing with 0 5 mm finishing allowance Measuring Rectangular stud finishing in accordance with the measured values 17 14 Programming Examples Tool call for roughing Retract the tool Length of rectangle in X roughing dimension Length of rectangle in Y roughing dimension Call subprogram for machining Retract the tool change the tool Call the touch probe Measure the rough milled rectangle Nominal length in X final dimension Nominal length in Y final dimension Inout values for tolerance checking not required 98 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il A
12. 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Slot length 0218 value parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter the length of the slot Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Slot width Q219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Maximum slot width for roughing Twice the tool diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Angle of rotation 0374 absolute Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle is called Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Slot position 0 1 2 3 4 Q367 Position of the slot in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position Center of slot 1 Tool position Left end of slot 2 Tool position Center of left slot circle 3 Tool position Center of right slot circle 4 Tool position Right end of slot Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb
13. 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 G202 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G202 Please note while programming Q 68 Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle This cycle is effective only for machines with servo controlled spindle Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed After the cycle is completed the TNC restores the coolant and spindle conditions that were active before the cycle call Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface Select a disengaging direction in which the tool moves away from the edge of the hole Check the position of the tool tip when you program a spindle orientation to the angle that you enter in Q336 for example in the Positioning with Manual Data Inout mode of operation Set the angle so that the tool tip is parallel to a coordinate axis During retraction the TNC automatical
14. 9 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 j il 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 Please note while programming 356 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Thread position 0471 Define the position of the thread 0 External thread 1 Internal thread Thread orientation 0461 Define direction of the thread pitch 0 Longitudinal parallel to rotary axis 1 Transverse perpendicular to rotary axis Set up clearance 0460 Set up clearance perpendicular to thread pitch Thread pitch 0472 Pitch of the thread Depth of thread 0473 Depth of the thread If you enter O the depth is assumed for a metric thread based on the pitch Dimension type of taper 0464 Define the dimension type for the taper contour 0 Via starting and end point 1 Via end point start X and taper angle 2 Via end point start Z and taper angle 3 Via start point end X and taper angle 4 Via start point end Z and taper angle Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the starting point diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the end point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 ee Q493 Q492 a Q491 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 j il a
15. Cycles Turning il 13 13 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 Application This cycle enables you to face turn plunge elements undercuts You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter Q491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter Q491 is less than the end diameter Q493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate Q478 The return movements are then each at set up clearance 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in the plane direction at the defined feed rate 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate Q478 by the infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 s ai TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 i il 13 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 Finishing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinat
16. HEIDENHAIN Program run full sequence TNC nc_prog DEMO CAD wheelgirder H wheelgirder H 0 BEGIN PGM WHEEL 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 100 Y 100 245 F BLK FORM 0 2 X 130 Y 100 2Z 50 5 TOOL CALL 5 Z 1860 6 CYCL DEF 7 0 DATUM SHIFT r CYCL DEF 7 1 z 0 68 CYCL DEF 7 2 Y 0 CYCL DEF 7 3 X 0 10 CYCL DEF 8 0 MIRRORING 11 CYCL DEF 8 1 12 CYCL DEF 10 0 ROTATION 13 CYCL DEF 10 1 ROT 0 14 CYCL DEF 11 0 SCALING FACTOR 15 CYCL DEF 11 1 SCL 1 16 L X 30 759 Y 19 164 24150 FMAX M3 L X 30 759 Y 19 164 2454 608 FMAX M8 ot X 758 Y 1 164 Z 44 608 F2000 19 L x G Y 18 66 2 44 L X 31 418 Y 18 143 244 L x 1 7 Y 1 08 Z 0 X Nm PS T21 0 Y Nm 16 20 Y 6 817 0 000 Z 100 000 Mode ACTL Po C0 e eA SOO S sOV Sar NOME MMM ior ED BRIM MMEIEIED Go JMO JIC Ie il a Ewe cE O BBB Pana e A y3 Wee amp SSE O pan S Go 2 EJP rogram run full sequence Programing T 5 Bs 1860 F Omm min Ovr 100 o o 0 B pooo m Cogo ooga monn vie comm oasa EI nann oo E om La bnn banal 8 HEIDENHAIN User s Manual Cycle Programming TNC 640 NC Software 340590 01 340591 01 340594 01 English en 3 2012 About this Manual The symbols used in this manual are described below About this Manual Would you like any changes or have you found any errors We are continuously striving to im
17. In every probing process the TNC first measures the radius of the calibration sphere If the measured sphere radius differs from the entered sphere radius by more than you have defined in machine parameter maxDevCalBall the TNC shows an error message and ends the measurement Save the active kinematic configuration before an optimization with Cycle 450 so that in case of an emergency the most recently active kinematic configuration can be restored Programming in inches The TNC always records the log data and results of measurement in millimeters Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Cycle parameters gt Mode 0 Check 1 Measure O406 Specify whether the TNC should check or optimize the active kinematics 0 Check the active machine kinematics The TNC measures the kinematics in the rotary axes you have defined but it does not make any changes to it The TNC displays the results of measurement in a measurement log 1 Optimize the active machine kinematics The TNC measures the kinematics in the rotary axes you have defined and optimizes the position of the rotary axes of the active kinematics Exact calibration sphere radius 0407 Enter the exact radius of the calibration sphere used Input range 0 0001 to 99 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP in the touch probe table Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternative
18. Measuring position 3 0411 2 stepping angle 50 gt 51 Measuring position 4 0411 3 stepping angle 90 gt 90 9 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 516 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Choice of number of measuring points To save time you can make a rough optimization with a small number of measuring points 1 or 2 for example during commissioning You then make a fine optimization with a medium number of measuring points recommended value approx 4 Higher numbers of measuring points do not usually improve the results Ideally you should distribute the measuring points evenly over the tilting range of the axis This is why you should measure an axis with a tilting range of 0 to 360 at three measuring points namely at 90 180 and 270 Thus define a starting angle of 90 and an end angle of 270 If you want to check the accuracy accordingly you can also enter a higher number of measuring points in the Check mode ignored because the reference measurement is always If a measuring point has been defined at 0 it will be done at O Choice of the calibration sphere position on the machine table In principle you can fix the calibration sphere to any accessible position on the machine table and also on fixtures or workpieces The following factors should positively influence the result of measurement On machines with rotary tables tilting tab
19. O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract the tool change the tool Call tool tap Move tool to clearance height Cycle definition for tapping O must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Retract in the tool axis end program Examples 4 11 Programming o i Point table TAB1 PNT Examples om O O S A q 3 26 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il ton a en Ti 5 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers 6 cycles for machining pockets studs and slots E 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET 251 Page 129 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of kim am machining operation and helical plunging 252 CIRCULAR POCKET 252 Page 134 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of jm machining operation and helical plunging 253 SLOT MILLING 253 Page 138 Roughing finishing cycle with selection of fim lt machining operation and reciprocal plunging 254 CIRCULAR SLOT 254 Page 143 Roughing finishing cycle with selectionof sa machining operation and reciprocal plunging 256 RECTANGULAR STUD 256 Page 148 Roughing finishing cycle with stepover if 2740 multiple passes are required 257 CIRCULAR STUD 257 Page 152 Roughing finishing cycle wi
20. OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO TE lt x O co T S il G414 OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO LL lt m oO Cycle parameters 414 428 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Spacing in 1st axis 0326 incremental Distance between the first and second measuring points in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 1st axis Q296 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 2nd axis 0297 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Spacing in 2nd axis 0327 incremental Distance between third and fourth measuring points in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point
21. ase workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is ea referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from Example NC blocks in new format safetyDistStylus Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 533 G480 20 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO Ce G481 20 3 Measuring the Tool Length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO 20 3 Measuring the Tool Length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO G481 Cycle run To measure the tool length program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 31 or TCH PROBE 480 see also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 529 Via input parameters you can measure the length of a tool by three methods If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT you measure the tool while it is rotating If the tool diameter is smaller than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT or if you are measuring the length of a drill or spherical cutter you measure the tool while It is at standstill If the tool diameter is larger than the diameter of the measuring surface of the TT you measure the individual teeth of the tool while it is at standstill Cycle for measuring a tool during rotation The control determines the longest t
22. the TNC compensates the tool radius as described above From the defined traversing direction Q267 the TNC determines the direction of compensation If the touch probe axis is defined as measuring axis 0272 3 the TNC compensates the tool length 458 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Tool breakage monitoring The TNC will output an error message and stop program run if the measured deviation is greater than the breakage tolerance of the tool At the same time the tool will be deactivated in the tool table column TL L Reference system for measurement results The TNC transfers all the measurement results to the result parameters and the log file in the active coordinate system or as the case may be the shifted and or rotated tilted coordinate system HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 17 1 Fundamentals o i G55 17 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO 17 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO G55 Cycle run 1 The touch probe moves in a 3 D movement at rapid traverse value from FMAX column to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle Then the touch probe runs the probing process at the probing feed rate column F The probing direction is to be defined in the cycle After the TNC has saved the position the probe retracts to the starting point and saves the measured coordinate in a Q parameter The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch probe position at the time of the triggering si
23. 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 Reserved currently without function Q478 Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing am If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for Q483 the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction 13 A ECESSING CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 349 il a CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 350 gt Finishing feed rate Q505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Cutting limit 0479 Activate the cutting limit 0 No cutting limit active 1 Cutting limit 0480 0482 Limit value for diameter O480 X value for contour limitation diameter value Limit value Z 0482 Z value for contour limitation m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 22 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 Application This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of threads You can process single threads or multi threads with the cycle If you do not enter a thread depth the cycle uses thread depth in accordance with the IS01502 standard The cycle can be used for inside and outside
24. 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G427 a MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO j il G427 m x D 3 pei D Z O T e zA A ES MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO 490 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR427 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt Maximum limit of size Q288 Maximum permissible measured value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Minimum limit of size 0289 Minimum permissible measured value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring
25. 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set In the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G410 Example NC blocks O L Z m Q gt LLJ al g Q LLJ as LL O LLJ Y Z 16 4 DATUM FRON HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 A _ 2 16 5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO G411 G411 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 411 finds the center of a rectangular stud and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates Into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the
26. Diameter of the completely machined stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank diameter 0222 Diameter of the workpiece blank Enter the workpiece blank diameter greater than the finished diameter The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between the workpiece blank diameter and finished diameter is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO FU FZ gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coo
27. Do not move to clearance height between measuring points Set display Set the display in X to O Set the display in Y to 10 Without function since display is to be set Also set datum in the touch probe axis X coordinate of touch point Y coordinate of touch point Z coordinate of touch point Set the display in Z to 0 Measure circle with 4 probes Move on circular path between measuring points Call part program G419 3 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO S i G419 3 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO The measured bolt hole center shall be written In the preset table so that it may be used at a later time A 50 Call tool O to define the touch probe axis Cycle definition for datum setting in the touch probe axis Touch point X coordinate Touch point Y coordinate Touch point Z coordinate Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Write Z coordinate in line 1 Set touch probe axis to 0 In the preset table PRESET PR save the calculated datum referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Center of the bolt hole circle X coordinate Center of the bolt hole circle Y coordinate Diameter of the bolt hole circle Polar coordinate angle for 1st hole center 1 Polar coordinate angle for 2nd hole center 2 Polar coor
28. HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 No measuring log transmission Do not output an error message No tool monitoring Calculate length in X including the measured deviation Calculate length in Y including the measured deviation Retract the touch probe change the tool Tool call for finishing Call subprogram for machining Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram with fixed cycle for rectangular stud Length in X variable for roughing and finishing Length in Y variable for roughing and finishing Cycle call End of subprogram 17 14 Programming Examples S i 17 14 Programming Examples Tool call for touch probe Retract the touch probe Nominal length in X Nominal length in Y gI 00 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 17 14 Programming Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Maximum limit in X Minimum limit in X Maximum limit in Y Minimum limit in Y Permissible position deviation in X Permissible position deviation in Y Save measuring log to a file Do not display an error message in case of a tolerance violation No tool monitoring Retract in the tool axis end program i i 17 14 Programming Examples 502 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions 18 1 Fundamentals 18 1 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPE
29. In the cycle you can define an angle for the face and a radius for the contour edge You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter Q491 is less than the end diameter Q493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate Q478 The return movements are then each at set up clearance 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in the plane direction at the defined feed rate 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate Q478 by the infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 SVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 lt cc Jaa a v i il NSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 13 14 TURN T Finishing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the
30. Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the hole with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D Z O za e a A 16 6 PATO O INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 42 Ge G412 G413 16 7 DATUM bu OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO 16 7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 413 finds the center of a circular stud and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch
31. Please note while programming 463 Cycle parameters 464 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 466 Cycle run 466 Please note while programming 466 Cycle parameters 467 17 6 MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 470 Cycle run sexes 470 Please note while programming 470 Cycle parameters 471 17 7 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO G423 474 Cycle run 474 Please note while programming 475 Cycle parameters 475 17 8 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO G424 478 Cycle run 478 Please note while programming 479 Cycle parameters 479 17 9 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 482 Cycle run 482 Please note while programming 482 Cycle parameters 483 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 32 17 10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 DIN ISO G426 485 Cycle run 485 Please note while programming 485 Cycle parameters 486 17 11 MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO G427 488 Cycle run 488 Please note while programming 488 Cycle parameters 489 17 12 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO G430 491 Cycle run 491 Please note while programming 491 Cycle parameters 492 17 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO G431 495 Cycle run 495 Please note while programming 496 Cycle parameters 496 17 14 Pr
32. Tool number in the tool table TOOL T gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 0365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D Z O 2a e a A 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 i i G422 B MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO 176 MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 422 measures the center and diameter of a circular stud If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TNC derives
33. Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is less than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than 0492 CONTOUR START IN Z the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate 0478 The return movements are then each at set up clearance 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with 0463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate 0478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point 298 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point
34. between upper surface of stylus and lower surface of tool Default O Permissible deviation from tool length L for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for breakage detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Number of teeth Wear tolerance length Wear tolerance radius Cutting direction M3 Tool offset radius Tool offset length Breakage tolerance length Breakage tolerance radius 531 20 1 Fundamentals 20 1 Fundamentals Input examples for common tool types Drill no function O no offset required because tool tip is to be measured End mill with diameter lt 19mm_ 4 4 teeth O no offset required because tool diameter is smaller than the contact plate diameter of the TT O no additional offset required during radius measurement Offset from of fsetToolAxis is used End mill with diameter gt 19mm 4 4 teeth Radius cutter 4 4 teeth R offset required because tool diameter is larger than the contact plate diameter of the TT O no additional offset required during radius measurement Offset from offsetToolAxis is used O no offset required because the south pole of the ball is to be measured 5 always define the tool radius as the of
35. can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position for actual drilling operation The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 lt A J N O gt J g lt ol as A LLI ol O T 0 LLI LLJ A A LLI ol g Z Y a7 G241 m x D 3 p D O za e zA A 3 10 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO 88 gt Rotat dir of entry exit 3 4 5 0426 Desired direction of spindle rotation when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input 3 Spindle rotation with M3 4 Spindle rotation with M4 5 Movement with stationary spindle gt Spindle speed of entry exit 0427 Desired spindle speed when tool moves into and retracts from the hole Input range 0 to 99999 Drilling speed 04
36. extended 298 Plunge longitudinal 294 Plunge transverse 317 Recessing contour axial 347 Recessing contour radial 336 Recessing axial 340 Recessing axial extended 343 Recessing radial 329 Recessing radial extended 332 Shoulder face 310 Shoulder face extended 313 Shoulder longitudinal 287 Shoulder longitudinal extended 290 Thread contour parallel 359 Thread extended 355 Thread longitudinal 351 Transverse plunge extended 321 U Universal drilling 71 79 W Width measuring from inside 482 Width measuring from outside 485 Working plane tilting the 260 Cycle 260 Guide 265 Workpiece measurement 454 HEIDENHAIN DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Strave 5 83301 Traunreut Germany 49 8669 31 0 49 8669 5061 E mail info heidenhain de Technical support 49 8669 32 1000 Measuring systems 49 8669 31 3104 E mail service ms Support heidenhain de TNC support lt gt 49 8669 31 3101 E mail service nc support heidenhain de NC programming 49 8669 31 3103 E mail service nc pgm heidenhain de PLC programming 49 8669 31 3102 E mail service plc heidenhain de Lathe controls lt gt 49 8669 31 3105 E mail service lathe support heidenhain de www heidenhain de Touch probes from HEIDENHAIN help you reduce non productive time and improve the dimensional accuracy of the finished
37. parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length 0324 incremental Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 ere EURUCHEROB E TIF G411 16 5 DATUM i aiii OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO o il G411 16 5 DATUM a OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO 416 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the stud center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the stud center Inout range O to 2999 New datum for r
38. program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 parallel to the direction of the steeper inclination If you are using a spherical cutter for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following way When milling twisted surfaces program the main cutting direction from point 1 to point 2 perpendicular to the direction of the steepest inclination Please note while programming linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and fixtures can occur From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation RO to the programmed positions If required use a center cut end mill ISO 1641 232 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il Cycle parameters 231 m Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 3rd axis Q227 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the tool axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd point in 1st axis Q228 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to
39. 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks Q355 gt 1 10 G262 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DI G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 so 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 DIN ISO G263 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking 2 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth minus the set up clearance and then at the feed rate for countersinking to the countersinking depth If a set up clearance to the side has been entered the TNC immediately positions the tool at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth Then depending on the available space the TNC makes a tangential approach
40. 261 Cycle parameters 261 Resetting 261 Positioning the axes of rotation 262 Position display in the tilted system 264 Workspace monitoring 264 Positioning in a tilted coordinate system 264 Combining coordinate transformation cycles 264 Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 265 11 10 Programming Examples 266 12 1 Fundamentals 2 0 Overview 270 12 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO GOA 271 Function 271 Cycle parameters 271 12 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO G39 272 Cycle function 272 Please note while programming 272 Cycle parameters 273 12 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Cycle 13 DIN ISO G36 Cycle function 274 Please note while programming 274 Cycle parameters 274 12 5 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 275 Cycle function 275 Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system 276 Please note while programming 214 Cycle parameters 278 bene 274 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 23 il 24 13 1 Turning Cycles Software Option 50 280 Overview 280 Working with turning cycles 282 13 2 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 800 283 Application 283 Effect 284 Cycle parameters 284 13 3 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 801 285 Application 285 Effect 285 Cycle parameters 285 13 4 Fundamentals of Turni
41. 267 DIN ISO G267 120 Cycle run 120 Please note while programming 121 Cycle parameters 122 4 11 Programming Examples 124 14 5 1 Fundamentals 128 Overview 128 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO G251 129 Cycle run 129 Please note while programming 130 Cycle parameters 131 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 252 DIN ISO G252 134 Cycle run 134 Please note while programming 135 Cycle parameters 136 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253 DIN ISO G253 138 Cycle run 138 Please note while programming 139 Cycle parameters 140 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO G254 143 Cycle run 143 Please note while programming 144 Cycle parameters 145 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 DIN ISO G256 148 Cycle run 148 Please note while programming 149 Cycle parameters 150 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 257 DIN ISO G257 152 Cycle run 152 Please note while programming 153 Cycle parameters 154 5 8 Programming Examples 156 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 15 il 6 1 Fundamentals 160 Overview 160 6 2 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 DIN ISO G220 161 Cycle run 161 Please note while programming 161 Cycle parameters 162 6 3 CARTESIAN PATTERN Cycle 221 DIN ISO G221 164 Cycle run 164 Please note while programming 164 Cy
42. 99999 9999 Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Inout range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at front Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 Countersink O360 Execution of the chamfer 0 before thread machining 1 after thread machining Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for countersink
43. Application This cycle enables you to run both face turning and longitudinal turning of threads or tapered threads Expanded scope of function Selection of longitudinal thread or face thread The parameters for dimension type of taper taper angle and contour Starting point X enable the definition of various tapered threads The parameters for approach path and overrun path define a path in which feed axes can be accelerated or decelerated You can process single threads or multi threads with the cycle If you do not enter a thread depth in the cycle the cycle uses a standardized thread depth The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining Cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called 1 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set up clearance in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion 2 The TNC runs a longitudinal cut Here the TNC synchronizes teed rate and speed so that the defined pitch is machined 3 The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set up clearance 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC runs an infeed motion The infeeds are run according to the angle of infeed Q467 6 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 5 until the thread depth is completed 7 The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in 0476 8 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 7 according to the number of traverses 0475
44. Enter the code To exit a datum table Select a different type of file in file management and choose the desired file After you have changed a value in a datum table you must save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change may not be included during program run Status displays In the additional status display the TNC shows the values of the active datum shift 250 manual operation 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 BEGIN Tane editing G Programming Table editing cooosd oooo0oo coooeoe eo 8 Cycles Coordinate Transformations 11 4 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 DIN ISO G247 Effect With the DATUM SETTING cycle you can activate as the new datum a preset defined in a preset table Aftera DATUM SETTING cycle definition all of the coordinate inputs and datum shifts absolute and incremental are referenced to the new preset Status display In the status display the TNC shows the active preset number behind the datum symbol Please note before programming resets the datum shift mirroring rotation scaling factor When activating a datum from the preset table the TNC and axis specific scaling factor If you activate preset number O line 0 then you activate the datum that you last set in a manual operating mode Cycle 247 is not functional in Test Run mode Cycle parameters Number for datum Enter the number of the datum to wus be activated from the pre
45. G28 g gt Mirrored axis Enter the axis to be mirrored Youcan Example NC blocks mirror all axes including rotary axes with the exception of the spindle axis and its associated 79 CYCL DEF 8 0 MIRROR IMAGE auxiliary axis You can enter up to three axes Input 80 CYCL DEF 8 1 XYZ 00022 2 2 22 range Up to three NC axes X Y Z U V W A B C O A Z O co a O gt 2 LLI g lt as 11 5 M HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 253 il G73 1 WROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO 11 6 ROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO G73 Effect The TNC can rotate the coordinate system about the active datum in the working plane within a program The ROTATION cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active rotation angle is shown in the additional status display Reference axis for the rotation angle X Y plane X axis Y Z plane Y axis Z X plane Z axis Resetting Program the ROTATION cycle once again with a rotation angle of 0 Please note while programming Cycle 10 and must therefore be reprogrammed if An active radius compensation is canceled by defining necessary After defining Cycle 10 you must move both axes of the working plane to activate rotation for all axes 254 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters Rotation Enter the rotation angle in degrees Input range 360 000 t
46. G404 392 Cycle run 392 Cycle parameters 392 15 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment by Rotating the C Axis Cycle 405 DIN ISO G405 393 Cycle run 393 Please note while programming 394 Cycle parameters 395 28 16 1 Fundamentals 400 Overview 400 Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for datum setting 401 16 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 403 Cycle run 403 Please note while programming 404 Cycle parameters 404 16 3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER Cycle 409 DIN ISO G409 407 Cycle run 407 Please note while programming 407 Cycle parameters 408 16 4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO G410 410 Cycle run 410 Please note while programming 411 Cycle parameters 411 16 5 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO G411 414 Cycle run 414 Please note while programming 415 Cycle parameters 415 16 6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 418 Cycle run 418 Please note while programming 419 Cycle parameters 419 16 7 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO 6413 422 Cycle run 422 Please note while programming 423 Cycle parameters 423 16 8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO 6414 426 Cycle run 426 Please note while programming 427 Cycle pa
47. No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first time old format Example Inspecting a tool and measuring the individual teeth and saving the status in Q5 old format Example NC blocks in new format Tool Length and Radius Cycle 33 or 483 DIN ISO Ol oO co G483 O N 20 8vD OSI NIC E8P 10 9 9AD snipey pue y 6u 37 OoL puunsecie 02 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il 540 Overview Fixed cycles 7 14 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2J 28 29 32 200 201 Page 65 202 Page 67 203 204 205 Datum shift Dwell time Rotation Scaling Contour geometry Pilot drilling SL Il Contour train Cylinder surface Cylinder surface ridge Drilling Reaming Boring Back boring HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Page 245 Mirror image Page 252 Page 271 Page 254 Page 256 Program call Page 272 Oriented spindle stop Page 274 Page 172 Tilting the working plane Page 260 Contour data SL Il Page 177 Page 179 Rough out SL Il Page 181 Floor finishing SL Il Page 184 Page 186 Side finishing SL Il Page 188 Page 258 Axis specitic scaling Page 199 Cylindrical surface slot Page 202 Page 205 Page 275 Tolerance Page 63 Universal drilling Page 71 Page 75 Univer
48. Q11 Plunging feed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for roughing O12 Milling feed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Coarse roughing tool Q18 or OS18 Number or name of the tool with which the TNC has already coarse roughed the contour Press the TOOL NAME soft key to switch to name input The TNC automatically inserts the closing quotation mark when you exit the input field If there was no coarse roughing enter 0 if you enter a number or a name the TNC will only rough out the portion that could not be machined with the coarse roughing tool If the portion that is to be roughed cannot be approached from the side the TNC will mill in a reciprocating plunge cut for this purpose you must enter the tool length LCUTS in the tool table TOOL T and define the maximum plunging ANGLE of the tool The TNC will otherwise generate an error message Input range 0 to 32767 9 if a number is entered maximum 16 characters if a name is entered gt Reciprocation feed rate O19 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during reciprocating plunge cut Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining It you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the teed rate in Q12 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO HE
49. Q377 Number of machining operations on a pitch circle Inout range 1 to 99999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than O Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut O338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Plunging strat
50. SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 SER ORTCHPROBE TH Q320 G402 X ION over Two Studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO cc 2 Y lt q aa q LO q C il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points G402 m x D 3 p D O T e o A Preset value for rotation angle Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 gt Preset number in table Q305 Enter the preset number in the table in which the TNC is to save the determined basic rotation If you enter OQ305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode The parameter has no effect if the misalignment is to be compensated by a rotation of the rotary table Q402 1 In this case the misalignment is not
51. Software Option 1 199 Execution of cycle 199 Please note while programming 200 Cycle parameters 201 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot Milling Cycle 28 DIN ISO G128 Software Option 1 202 Cycle run 202 Please note while programming 203 Cycle parameters 204 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge Milling Cycle 29 DIN ISO G129 Software Option 1 205 Cycle run 205 Please note while programming 206 Cycle parameters 207 8 5 Programming Examples 208 18 9 1 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula 214 Fundamentals 214 Selecting a program with contour definitions 216 Defining contour descriptions 216 Entering a complex contour formula 217 Overlapping contours 218 Contour machining with SL Cycles 220 9 2 SL Cycles with Simple Contour Formula 224 Fundamentals 224 Entering a simple contour formula 225 Contour machining with SL Cycles 225 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 19 il 10 1 Fundamentals 228 Overview 228 10 2 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 DIN ISO G230 229 Cycle run 229 Please note while programming 229 Cycle parameters 230 10 3 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 DIN ISO G21 231 Cycle run 231 Please note while programming 232 Cycle parameters 233 10 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 DIN ISO G232 235 Cycle run 235 Please note while programming 237 C
52. TNC 640 457 17 1 Fundamentals Tolerance monitoring For most of the cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the TNC perform tolerance monitoring This requires that you define the necessary limit values during cycle definition If you do not wish to monitor for tolerances simply leave the O the default value in the monitoring parameters Tool monitoring For some cycles for workpiece inspection you can have the TNC perform tool monitoring The TNC then monitors whether The tool radius should be compensated because of the deviations from the nominal value values in Q16x The deviations from the nominal value values in Q16x are greater than the tool breakage tolerance Tool compensation This function works only If the tool table is active If tool monitoring is switched on in the cycle enter a tool name or Q330 unequal to 0 Select the tool name input by soft key The TNC no longer displays the right single quotation mark If you perform several compensation measurements the TNC adds the respective measured deviation to the value stored in the tool table The TNC always compensates the tool radius in the DR column of the tool table even if the measured deviation lies within the given tolerance You can Inquire whether re working is necessary via parameter Q181 in the NC program Q181 1 must be reworked For Cycle 427 If an axis of the active working plane is defined as measuring axis Q272 1 or 2
53. Turning il Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance O460 Reserved currently without function Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the contour starting point diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the contour starting point Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle between the side at the contour starting point and the parallel line to the rotary axis Starting element type Q501 Define the type of the element at the contour start circumferential surface 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of starting element Q502 Size of the starting element chamfer section Radius of contour edge 0500 Radius of the inside contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of the cutting insert is generated Angle of second side 0496 Angle between the side at the contour end point and the parallel line to the rotary axis Type of end element Q503 Define the type of the element at the contour end 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of end element Q504 Size of the end element chamfer section Roughin
54. a plunge angle ANGLE is defined for the active tool If you define the ANGLE 90 the TNC plunges perpendicularly The reciprocation feed rate Q19 is used as plunging feed rate If the reciprocation feed rate Q19 is defined in Cycle 22 and ANGLE is defined between 0 1 and 89 999 in the tool table the TNC plunges helically at the defined ANGLE If the reciprocation feed is defined in Cycle 22 and no ANGLE is in the tool table the TNC displays an error message If geometrical conditions do not allow helical plunging slot geometry the TNC tries a reciprocating plunge The reciprocation length is calculated from LCUTS and ANGLE reciprocation length LCUTS tan ANGLE If you clear out an acute inside corner and use an overlap factor greater than 1 some material might be left over Check especially the innermost path in the test run graphic and if necessary change the overlap factor slightly This allows another distribution of cuts which often provides the desired results During fine roughing the TNC does not take a defined wear value DR of the coarse roughing tool into account Danger of collision After executing an SL cycle you must program the first traverse motion in the working plane with both coordinate data e g L X 80 Y 0 RO FMAX Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging
55. all axes If you set the function Tilting program run to Active in the Manual Operation mode the angular value entered in this menu is overwritten by Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 260 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Please note while programming The functions for tilting the working plane are interfaced to the TNC and the machine tool by the machine tool builder For certain swivel heads and tilting tables the machine tool builder specifies whether the entered angles are interpreted as coordinates of the rotary axes or as mathematical angles of a tilted plane Refer to your machine manual Because nonprogrammed rotary axis values are interpreted as unchanged you should always define all three spatial angles even if one or more angles are at zero The working plane is always tilted around the active datum If you use Cycle 19 when M120 is active the TNC automatically rescinds the radius compensation which also rescinds the M120 function Cycle parameters Rotary axis and tilt angle Enter the axes of rotation together with the associated tilt angles The rotary axes A B and C are programmed using soft keys Input range 360 000 to 360 000 If the TNC automatically positions the rotary axes you can enter the following parameters Feed rate F Traverse speed of the rotary axis during automatic positioning Input range O to 99999 999 Set up clearance incremental value The TNC positions the t
56. and probes the second touch point The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q parameters Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155 Actual value of length in the minor axis Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q164 Deviation of side length in reference axis 0165 Deviation of side length in minor axis 474 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points Cycle parameters a23 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the i pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 l
57. as possible to a slot machined with a tool of the same width as the slot Program the midpoint path of the contour together with the tool radius compensation With the radius compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the slot with climb milling or up cut milling 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point 2 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed slot wall at the milling feed rate Q12 while respecting the finishing allowance for the side 3 Atthe end of the contour the TNC moves the tool to the opposite wall and returns to the infeed point 4 Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 Ifyou have defined the tolerance in Q21 the TNC then remachines the slot walls to be as parallel as possible 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle 202 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il L uondo 3iemyos 8ZLD OSI NIC 8Z 9194 Please note while programming 10 S ADVAUNS YAGNITAO 8 i i HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G128 Software Option 1 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot Milling Cycle 28 DIN ISO Cycle parameters y CO 204 Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance on th
58. at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to a safe position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call cycle starting point affects the area to be machined The TNC takes the cutting geometry of the tool into account to prevent damage to contour elements If complete machining with the active tool is not possible a warning is output by the TNC Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 8 TURN i ai PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 j il 13 8 TURN een PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 Cycle parameters Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle of the plu
59. be inspected If the tool is being measured for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool radius R and the tool length L in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta values DR 0 and DL O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured data with the tool data stored in TOOL T The TNC calculates the deviations and enters them as positive or negative delta values DR and DL in TOOL T The deviations are also available in the Q parameters Q115 and Q116 If the delta values are greater than the permissible tool tolerances for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL T Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn LTOL or and RTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken LBREAK or and RBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Cutter measurement 0
60. be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd point in 2nd axis Q229 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd point in 3rd axis Q230 absolute End point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the spindle axis Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 1st axis 0231 absolute Coordinate of point 3 in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 2nd axis Q232 absolute Coordinate of point 3 In the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd point in 3rd axis Q233 absolute Coordinate of point 3 in the spindle axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 _ are Q231 Q234 0225 G231 X 10 3 RULED a a Cycle 231 DIN ISO j il G231 m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A 10 3 RULED sufihce Cycle 231 DIN ISO 234 gt Ath point in 1st axis Q234 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 4th point in 2nd axis Q235 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Ath point in 3rd axis Q236 absolute Coordinate of point 4 in the spindle axis Inout range 9999
61. countersinking 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 DIN HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 123 il i gt ent J es Q 3 z 5 Q rTi x Q 3 Oo V The drill hole coordinates are stored in the point table TAB1 PNT and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL PAT The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be seen in the test graphics Program sequence Centering E Drilling E Tapping 4 11 Programmi Examples Definition of workpiece blank Call tool centering drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F The TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle Definition of point table Cycle definition CENTERING O must be entered here effective as defined in point table O must be entered here effective as defined in point table 24 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Cycle call in connection with point table TAB1 PNT Feed rate between points 5000 mm min Retract the tool change the tool Call tool drill Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F Cycle definition drilling O must be entered here effective as defined in point table
62. cutter traverses around islands instead of over them E The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies to the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles E The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing E For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for spindle axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and set up clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 170 Example Program structure Machining with SL cycles Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Overview 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY essential 20 CONTOUR DATA essential 21 PILOT DRILLING optional 22 ROUGH OUT essential 23 FLOOR FINISHING optional 24 SIDE FINISHING optional Enhanced cycles Page 188 25 CONTOUR TRAIN HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 F N D g G 25 Page 172 Page 177 Page 179 Page 181 Page 184 Page 186 7 1 SL Cycles k i 72 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 DIN ISO G37 G37 Please note while programming All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Be
63. dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance O460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning gt Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value gt Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point gt Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour In axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Q484 Q478 qam 0483 Example NC blocks 28 co SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 b e q 13 6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 13 6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 Application This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end In the cycle you can define angles for the fac
64. displayed positions ACTL and NOML and the datum indicated in the additional status display are referenced to the tilted coordinate system The positions displayed immediately after cycle definition might not be the same as the coordinates of the last programmed position before Cycle 19 Workspace monitoring The TNC monitors only those axes in the tilted coordinate system that are moved If necessary the TNC outputs an error message Positioning in a tilted coordinate system With the miscellaneous function M130 you can move the tool while the coordinate system is tilted to positions that are referenced to the non tilted coordinate system Positioning movements with straight lines that are referenced to the machine coordinate system blocks with M91 or M92 can also be executed in a tilted working plane Constraints Positioning is without length compensation Positioning is without machine geometry compensation Tool radius compensation is not permitted Combining coordinate transformation cycles When combining coordinate transformation cycles always make sure the working plane is swiveled around the active datum You can program a datum shift before activating Cycle 19 In this case you are shifting the machine based coordinate system If you program a datum shift after having activated Cycle 19 you are shifting the tilted coordinate system Important When resetting the cycles use the reverse sequence used for defining
65. end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of circumferential surface 0495 Angle between the circumferential surface and the rotary axis Starting element type Q501 Define the type of the element at the contour start circumferential surface 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Q460 Q478 e Size of starting element Q502 Size of the starting element chamfer section Radius of contour edge Q500 Radius of the inside contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of the cutting insert is generated 292 Cycles Turning il gt Angle of face 0496 Angle between the face and the rotary axis gt Type of end element 0503 Define the type of the element at the contour end face 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element Is a radius Size of end element Q504 Size of the end element chamfer section gt Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M
66. extended Thread contour parallel Thread longitudinal Thread extended Recessing contour radial Recessing radial Recessing radial extended Recessing contour axial Recessing axial Recessing axial extended HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Page 283 Page 285 Page 302 Page 287 Page 290 Page 294 Page 298 Page 306 Page 325 Page 310 Page 313 Page 317 Page 321 Page 359 Page 351 Page 355 Page 336 Page 329 Page 332 Page 347 Page 340 Page 343 j il Overview Overview Touch probe cycles 0 30 31 32 33 400 401 402 403 404 405 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 544 Reference plane Polar datum Measuring Calibrate TT Measure Inspect the tool length Measure Inspect the tool radius Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius Basic rotation using two points Basic rotation over two holes Basic rotation over two studs Compensate misalignment with rotary axis Set basic rotation Compensate misalignment with the C axis Reference point at slot center FCL 3 function Reference point at ridge center FCL 3 function Datum from inside of rectangle Datum from outside of rectangle Datum from inside of circle hole Datum from outside of circle stud Datum from outside of corner Datum from inside of corner Datum from circle center Datum in touch probe axis Datum at center between four holes Datum in any one axis Workpiece measure angle Workpi
67. heads A calibration sphere is fixed at any position on the machine table and measured with a resolution that you define During cycle definition you simply define for each rotary axis the area that you want to measure From the measured values the TNC calculates the static tilting accuracy The software minimizes the positioning error arising from the tilting movements and at the end of the measurement process automatically saves the machine geometry in the respective machine constants of the kinematic table Overview The TNC offers cycles that enable you to automatically save check and optimize the machine kinematics 450 SAVE KINEMATICS Automatically ase Page 510 saving and restoring kinematic configurations Measurement with TS Touch Probes KinematicsOpt Option 451 MEASURE KINEMATICS a51 Page 513 Automatically checking or optimizing the A machine kinematics xX a 508 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il 19 2 Prerequisites The following are prerequisites for using the KinematicsOpt option The software options 48 KinematicsOpt 8 Software option 1 and 17 Touch Probe function must be enabled The 3 D touch probe used for the measurement must be calibrated The cycles can only be carried out with the tool axis Z A calibration sohere with an exactly known radius and sufficient rigidity must be attached to any position on the machine table HEIDENHAIN recomme
68. hole Center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute Center of the first hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd hole Center in 1st axis Q270 absolute Center of the second hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd hole Center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute Center of the second hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Preset value for rotation angle Q307 absolute If the misalignment is to be measured against a straight line other than the reference axis enter the angle of this reference line The TNC will then calculate the difference between the value measured and the angle of the reference line for the basic rotation Input range 360 000 to 360 000 ION from Two Holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO cc Y lt aa ee LO q 384 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il gt Preset number in table Q305 Enter the preset Example NC blocks number in the table in which the TNC is to
69. il Entering a complex contour formula You can use soft keys to interlink various contours in a mathematical formula Show the soft key row with special functions FCT CONTOUR Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining conToUR Press the CONTOUR FORMULA soft key The TNC FORMULA then displays the following soft keys Intersected with OE e g QC10 QC1 amp QC5 es Joined with e g QC25 QC7 QC18 Complex Contour Formula Joined without intersection e g QC12 QC5 QC25 Without e g 0C25 QC1 QC2 m2 let let Opening parenthesis e g QC12 QC1 QC2 QC3 Closing parenthesis e g QC12 QC1 QC2 QC3 T O Q V Defining a single contour e g QC12 QC1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 217 il Complex Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles Overlapping contours By default the TNC considers a programmed contour to be a pocket With the functions of the contour formula you can convert a contour from a pocket to an island Pockets and Islands can be overlapped to form a new contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce it by an island Subprograms overlapping pockets description programs that are defined in a contour definition program The contour definition program is called through the SEL CONTOUR function in the actual main program The following programming e
70. in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you must enter the complete path for example TNC KLAR35 FK1 50 H If you want to define a DIN ISO program to be a cycle enter the file type behind the program name As a rule Q parameters are globally effective when called with Cycle 12 So please note that changes to Q parameters in the called program can also influence the calling program CYCL DEF 12 0 PGM CALL CYCL DEF 12 1 LOT31 9 M99 OTOT OTOMO TORO TOMOTOTOTOTOROTOMO e e oe oeo ooo oM Moo 0 BEGIN PGM LOT31 MM END PGM IO RO OROORO TONON yen es een Maer eae ee ee ee ee ee 8 8 Cycles Special Functions il Cycle parameters 12 Program name Enter the name of the program you PGM CALL want to call and if necessary the directory It is located in or activate the file select dialog with the SELECT soft key and select the program to be called Call the program with CYCL CALL separate block or E M99 blockwise or M89 executed after every positioning block HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G39 Example Designate program 50 as a cycle and call it with M99 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO 12 3 C i G36 RIENTATION Cycle 13 DIN ISO 12 4 SPINDLE C 12 4 SPINDLE ORIENTATION Cycle 13 DIN ISO G36 Cycle function The TNC can control the machine tool spindle and rotate it to a given angular position Machine
71. is not taken into account The slot position is determined from the entered pitch circle center and the starting angle 1 Tool position Center of left slot circle Starting angle Q376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account 2 Tool position Center of center line Starting angle Q376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account 3 Tool position Center of right slot circle Starting angle 0376 refers to this position The entered pitch circle center is not taken into account Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane Only effective if Q367 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q217 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane Only effective if Q367 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting angle Q376 absolute Enter the polar angle of the starting point Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Angular length Q248 incremental Enter the angular length of the slot Inout range 0 to 360 000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G254 OQ 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 25 i il G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle ee 146 Stepping angle 0378 incremental Angle by which the entire slot is rotated The center of rotation is at the center of the pitch circle Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Number of repetitions
72. machining process In the table select the point to be hidden Select the FADE column Activate hiding or ENT NO Deactivate hiding ENT HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 2 3 Point 2 3 point Miles Selecting a point table in the program In the Programming and Editing mode of operation select the program for which you want to activate the point table Press the PGM CALL key to call the function for gim selecting the point table Press the POINT TABLE soft key Enter the name of the point table and confirm your entry with the END key If the point table is not stored in the same directory as the NC program you must enter the complete path Example NC block Using Fixed Cycles il Calling a cycle in connection with point tables last defined even if you defined the point table in a a With CYCL CALL PAT the TNC runs the point table that you program that was nested with CALL PGM If you want the TNC to call the last defined fixed cycle at the points defined in a point table then program the cycle call with CYCLE CALL PAT To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL PAT soft key to call a point table Enter the feed rate at which the TNC is to move from point to point if you make no entry the TNC will move at the last programmed feed rate FMAX is not valid If required enter a miscellaneous function M then confirm with the END key The TNC ret
73. next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis in a separate probing and saves the actual values in the following Q parameters Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155 Actual value of length in the minor axis 16 5 DATUM a ene OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO 414 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between the touch probe and workpiece enter high estimates for the lengths of the first and second sides Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst side length 0323 incremental Stud length
74. note while programming automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle 6 3 CARTESIAN PATTERN Cycle 22 Cycle 221 is DEF active which means that Cycle 221 If you combine Cycle 221 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface 2nd set up clearance and the rotational position that you defined in Cycle 221 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle The slot position O is not allowed if you use Cycle 254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221 164 Fixed Cycles Pattern Definitions il Cycle parameters N Starting point 1st axis Q225 absolute Coordinate N of the starting point in the reference axis of the g working plane n gt Starting point 2nd axis Q226 absolute Coordinate O of the starting point in the minor axis of the working Y plane Spacing in 1st axis 0237 incremental Spacing lt between each point on a line Q gt Spacing in 2nd axis Q238 incremental Spacing between each line Number of columns Q242 Number of machining operations on a line gt Number of lines 0243 Number of passes Rotational position Q224 absolute Angle by which the entire pattern is rotated The center of rotation lies in the starting point gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface 2nd s
75. of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to SET _UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal length 0311 Nominal value of the length to be measured Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Maximum dimension Q288 Maximum permissible length Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum dimension Q289 Minimum permissible length Input range O to 99999 9999 X Owe O7 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il gt Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNCis Example NC blocks to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate
76. of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the approximate bolt hole circle diameter The smaller the hole diameter the more exact the nominal diameter must be Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Angle of 1st hole Q291 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the first hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 2nd hole Q292 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the second hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 3rd hole Q293 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the third hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 ATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO 16 436 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the bolt hole circle center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum Is on the bolt hole center Input range 0 to 2999
77. opposite the defined traverse direction 2 hen the TNC positions the touch probe to the entered touch point 1 in the working plane and measures the actual value in the selected axis 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured coordinate in the following O parameter Q160 Measured coordinate Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis 488 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters 427 ce Fh lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 SE TOPTCHPRROBE TE lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring axis 1 to 3 l reference axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis
78. parameters lst stud Center in 1st axis absolute Center of the first stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Ist stud Center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute Center of the first stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Diameter of stud 1 0313 Approximate diameter of the 1st stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height 1 in the probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis at which stud 1 Is to be measured Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd stud Center in 1st axis Q270 absolute Center of the second stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd stud Center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute Center of the second stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Diameter of stud 2 0314 Approximate diameter of the 2nd stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height of stud 2 in the probe axis 0315 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis at which stud 2 is to be measured Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to
79. path Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle of the plunging side The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the rotary axis Starting element type Q501 Define the type of the element at the contour start circumferential surface 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of starting element Q502 Size of the starting element chamfer section Radius of contour edge 0500 Radius of the inside contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of the cutting insert is generated Type of end element 0503 Define the type of the element at the contour end face 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of end element Q504 Size of the end element chamfer section Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed in axial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 SVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 Q483 lt as Jaa a f il 13 14 TURN sveRSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 324 gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for th
80. probe table Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis in a separate probing Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter 422 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a high estimate for the nominal diameter of the stud Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle increment Q247 the less accurately the TNC can calculate the datum Minimum input value 5 Cycle parameters
81. programmed in the As a rule the TNC moves without radius compensation RO to the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block If you use CYCL CALL POS to call a cycle in which a start position is defined for example Cycle 212 then the position defined in the cycle serves as an additional shift of the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block You should therefore always define the start position to be set in the cycle as 0 Calling a cycle with M99 89 The M99 function which is active only in the block in which it is programmed calls the last defined fixed cycle once You can program M99 at the end of a positioning block The TNC moves to this position and then calls the last defined fixed cycle If the TNC is to execute the cycle automatically after every positioning block program the cycle call with M89 To cancel the effect of M89 program M99 in the positioning block in which you move to the last starting point or Use CYCL DEF to define a new fixed cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 th Fixed sa ing wi 2 1 Work EF LLI E A INITION 2 2 Pattern Def 2 2 Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF Application You use the PATTERN DEF function to easily define regular machining patterns which you can call with the CYCL CALL PAT function As with the cycle definitions support graphics that illustrate the respective input parameter are also available for pattern definitions PATTERN DEF is to be used only in
82. range 0 to 99999 9999 Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Countersinking depth 0356 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Set up clearance to the side 0357 incremental Distance between tool tooth and the wall of the hole Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at front Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Countersinking offset at front Q359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 a
83. rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G206 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a Floating Tap Holder Cycle 206 Dijjyso G206 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a Floating Tap Holder Cycle 206 Diso Cycle parameters 206 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 times the thread pitch Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Total hole depth 0201 thread length incremental Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate F Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during tapping Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO gt Dwell time at bottom 0211 Enter a value between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction Input range 0 to 3600 0000 gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 The feed rate is calculated as follows F S x p F Feed rate mm min S Spindle speed rom p Thread pitch mm Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during tapping with the machine stop button the TNC will display a soft key with
84. saved as an angular value Input range 0 to 2999 gt Compensation 0402 Specify whether the TNC should compensate the measured misalignment with a basic rotation or by rotating the rotary table 0 Set basic rotation 1 Rotate the rotary table When you select rotary table the TNC does not save the measured misalignment not even when you have defined a table line in parameter Q305 ION over Two Studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment The TNC sets the display to 0 only if you have defined Q402 1 cc Y lt q aa x LO q 388 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 15 5 BASIC ROTATION Compensation via Rotary Axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO G403 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 403 determines a workpiece misalignment by measuring two points which must lie on a straight surface The TNC compensates the determined misalignment by rotating the A B or C axis The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the rotary table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the programmed starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the sa
85. set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum Is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system Is the machine coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range
86. slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Please note while programming radius compensation RO before the cycle call Program a positioning block to the starting position with The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 19 AXIAL RECESSING Cycle 871 o il 13 19 AXIAL RECESSING Cycle 871 Cycle parameters 871 Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Q460 Q484 gt Set up clearance 0460 Reserved currently without function gt Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing O etenaeapentnemmreaccionsenseammeemanceied If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per mi
87. spindle at which the thread start is to be made Number of starts 0475 Number of thread starts gt Number of air cuts 0476 Number of air cuts without infeed at finished thread depth i 13 25 Example program 13 25 Example program Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Activate Turning mode Constant surface speed Cycle definition adapt rotary coordinate system Feed rate in mm per revolution Move to starting point in the plane Set up clearance turning spindle on HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 363 il Cycle definition shoulder longitudinal 13 25 Example program Cycle call Turning spindle off Tool call Retract the tool Constant surface speed Cycle definition adapt rotary coordinate system Move to starting point in the plane Set up clearance turning spindle on W 64 Cycles Turning il Cycle definition recess 13 25 Example program Cycle call Turning spindle off Feed rate in mm per minute Retract the tool Activate Milling mode End of program HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 365 il weiboid ajdwexy GZ EL Cycles Turning il 366 Using Touch Probe Cycles neral Information about Touch Probe Cycles 14 1 General Information about Touch Probe Cycles HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing
88. starting point is less than the contour Starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to a safe position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call cycle starting point affects the area to be machined The TNC takes the cutting geometry of the tool into account to prevent damage to contour elements If complete machining with the active tool is not possible a warning is output by the TNC Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 322 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point for the plunging
89. starting position and the end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 i il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC traverses the tool in the Z coordinate by the set up clearance Q460 The movement is performed at rapid traverse 2 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse 3 The TNC finishes the finished part contour at the defined feed rate Q505 4 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to the starting position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 288 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters gt Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished
90. system adapting 283 Rotary coordinate system resetting 285 Rotation 254 Rough out See SL Cycles Rough out Ruled surface 231 o i Index Index S Scaling factor 256 Side finishing 186 Single lip deep hole drilling 86 SL Cycles SL cycles Contour data 177 Contour geometry cycle 172 Contour train 188 Floor finishing 184 Fundamentals 170 224 Overlapping contours 173 218 Pilot drilling 179 Rough out 181 Side finishing 186 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula SL cycles with simple contour formula 224 Slot milling Roughing finishing 138 Slot width measuring 482 T Tapping With a floating tap holder 95 With chip breaking 100 Without floating tap holder 97 100 Thread drilling milling 112 Thread milling fundamentals 103 Thread milling internal 105 Thread milling countersinking 108 Tilting the working plane 260 Tolerance monitoring 458 Tool compensation 458 Tool measurement 531 Calibrate the TT 533 Machine parameters 530 Measuring tool length and radius 538 Tool length 534 Tool radius 536 548 T Tool monitoring 458 Touch probe cycles Touch probe cycles for automatic operation 370 Touch probe data 375 Touch probe table 374 Turning cycles 280 286 Contour longitudinal 302 Contour transverse 325 Contour parallel 306 Longitudinal plunge
91. the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool to the first plunging depth at rapid traverse Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Cycle parameters 254 i gt Fa Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Slot width Q219 value parallel to the secondary axis of the working plane Enter the slot width If you enter a slot width that equals the tool diameter the TNC will carry out the roughing process only slot milling Maximum slot width for roughing Twice the tool diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Pitch circle diameter Q375 Enter the diameter of the pitch circle Inout range 0 to 99999 9999 Reference for slot position 0 1 2 3 Q367 Position of the slot in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 The tool position
92. the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Cutter measurement 0 No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first time old format Example Inspecting a tool and measuring the individual teeth and saving the status in Q5 old format Example NC blocks in new format 20 3 Measuring the Tool Length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO 53 Ol Ge G481 G482 20 4 Measuring the Tool Radius Cycle 32 or 482 DIN ISO 20 4 Measuring the Tool Radius Cycle 32 or 482 DIN ISO G482 Cycle run To measure the tool radius program the cycle TCH PROBE 32 or TCH PROBE 482 see also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 529 Select via inout parameters by which of two methods the radius of a tool is to be measured Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the milling tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in o
93. the second position 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the coordinates of the determined corner in the Q parameters listed below 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing O151 Actual value of corner in reference axis OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis gt lt x O co T 426 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC always measures the first line parallel to the reference axis in the direction of the minor axis of the working plane By defining the positions of the measuring points 1 and 3 you also determine the corner at which the TNC sets the datum see figure at right and table below Point 1 greater than point3 Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 less than point 3 Point 1 greater than point 3 U o wl gt Point 1 greater than point 3 Point 1 greater than point 3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G414
94. the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 m x D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO G416 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 416 finds the center of a bolt hole circle and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from column FMAX following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The
95. them 1st Activate the datum shift 2nd Activate tilting function 3rd Activate rotation Machining 1st Reset the rotation 2nd Reset the tilting function 3rd Reset the datum shift 264 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Procedure for working with Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE 1 Write the program Define the tool not required if TOOL T is active and enter the full tool length Call the tool Retract the tool in the tool axis to a position where there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or clamping devices during tilting If required position the rotary axis or axes with an L block to the appropriate angular value s depending on a machine parameter Activate datum shift if required Define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE enter the angular values for the rotary axes Traverse all principal axes X Y Z to activate compensation Write the program as if the machining process were to be executed in a non tilted plane If required define Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE with other angular values to execute machining in a different axis position In this case it is not necessary to reset Cycle 19 You can define the new angular values directly Reset Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE program 0 for all rotary axes Disable the WORKING PLANE function redefine Cycle 19 and answer the dialog question with NO ENT Reset datum shift if required Position the rotary axes to the 0 position if required 2 Clamp the workpiece 3
96. threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Total hole depth 0356 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth Input range O to 99999 9999 The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth Is greater than the depth Upper advanced stop distance 0258 incremental Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole Input range O to 99999 9999 Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking No chip breaking if O is entered Input range O to 99999 9999 Retraction rate for chip breaking 0256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 999
97. to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to the starting position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 314 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension oe 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the l 8 Q491 contour starting point diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the contour Starting point diameter value Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of a mimmi 9493 the contour end point diameter value Q494 Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of face 0495 Angle between the face and the rotary axis Starting element type Q501 Define the type of the element at the contour start circumferential surface 0484 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Elem
98. to the set up clearance at FMAX If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 9 BORE MILLING T 208 3 9 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 Please note while programming 84 Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance between tool lower edge and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during helical drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Infeed per helix 0334 incremental Depth of the tool plunge with each helix 360 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter 0335 absolute value Bore hole diameter If you have entered the nominal diameter to be the same as the tool diameter the TNC will bore directly to the entered depth without any helical interpolation Input range O to 99999 9999 Roughing diameter 0342 absolute As soon as you enter a value greater than O in Q342 the TNC no l
99. tool in the negative ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the negative minor axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the positive minor axis direction gt Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before retracting it Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool retracts at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance remains there if programmed for the entered dwell time and advances again at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first PLUNGING DEPTH The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If programmed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If
100. tool is moved 0 one helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by Q355 multiplied by the pitch Input range O to 99999 Feed rate for pre positioning 0253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Q355 gt 1 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance Example NC blocks between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0O to 99999 9999 gt Depth at front Q358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at front Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G267 Q Y gt Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the stud center Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for
101. traverse The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Please note while programming radius compensation RO before the cycle call Program a positioning block to the starting position with The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point 330 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters gt Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance O460 Reserved currently without function gt Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value gt Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour In axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpre
102. twelve cycles for automatically finding reference points and handling them as follows Setting the determined values directly as display values Entering the determined values in the preset table Entering the determined values in a datum table 408 SLOT CENTER REF PT Measuring M Page 403 the inside width of a slot and defining ae the slot center as datum 409 RIDGE CENTER REF PT Measuring ap Page 407 the outside width of a ridge and defining A the ridge center as datum 410 DATUM INSIDE RECTANGLE a10 Page 410 Measuring the inside length and width of a rectangle and defining the center as datum 411 DATUM OUTSIDE RECTANGLE a11 Page 414 Measuring the outside length and width of a rectangle and defining the center as datum 412 DATUM INSIDE CIRCLE Measuring Me Page 418 any four points on the inside of a circle and defining the center as datum 413 DATUM OUTSIDE CIRCLE a13 Page 422 Measuring any four points on the outside of a circle and defining the center as datum 414 DATUM OUTSIDE CORNER a14 Page 426 Measuring two lines from the outside of a corner and defining the intersection as datum 400 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 415 DATUM INSIDE CORNER a15 Page 431 Measuring two lines from the inside of a corner and defining the intersection as aL dad C eb datum 416 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER 2nd soft Page 435 s key row Measuring any three holes on a e bolt hole circle and defining t
103. until the programmed total hole depth is reached Countersinking at front 6 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front 7 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 8 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut 10 Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 11 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 12 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 112 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Digso G264 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 113 il G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Mso Cycle parameters 264 114 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand
104. which you can retract the tool 96 Example NC blocks Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a Floating Tap Holder NEW Cycle 207 DIN ISO G207 Cycle run The TNC cuts the thread without a floating tap holder in one or more passes 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool taps to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 The TNC brings spindle rotation to a stop at the set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Cycle 207 SO G207 DI Tap Holder NE 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a Floating SO G207 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a Floating Tap Holder NEW Cycle 207 D Please note while programming 98 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Cycle parameters 207 RT gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance 7 N N between tool tip at starting position and workpiece IR g surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 O 7 2 gt Total hole depth 0201 incremental Distance t Q between workpiece surface and end of thread Input y x Nt Wy range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pitch 0239 RY Ny
105. 0 000 to 120 000 ignmen ISa iIece M Workp 15 7 Compensating HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 395 il is G405 Cycle 405 DIN ISO m x D 3 pcs O T e o A ment by Rotating the C Ax ign 15 7 Compensating Workpiece Misal 396 gt Measuring height in the touch probe axis 0261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance Q320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the C axis to zero or write the angular offset in column C of the datum table 0 Set display of C to 0 gt 0 VWrite the angular misalignment including algebraic sign in the datum table Line number value of 0337 If a C axis shift is registered in the datum table the TNC adds the measur
106. 1 Probe in the machine based REF system and save measurement result in the REF system gt Error mode 0 0FF 1 0N Specify whether the TNC is to Issue an error message if the stylus is deflected at cycle start If you select mode 1 the TNC saves the value 1 in the fourth result parameter and continues the cycle 0 Issue error message 1 Do not issue error message Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 19 1 Kinematics Measurement with TS Touch Probes KinematicsOpt Option Fundamentals Accuracy requirements are becoming increasingly stringent particularly in the area of b axis machining Complex parts need to be manufactured with precision and reproducible accuracy even over long periods Some of the reasons for inaccuracy in multi axis machining are deviations between the kinematic model saved in the control see 1 in the figure at right and the kinematic conditions actually existing on the machine see 2 in the figure at right When the rotary axes are positioned these deviations cause inaccuracy of the workpiece see 3 in the figure at right It is therefore necessary for the model to approach reality as closely as possible The TNC function KinematicsOpt is an important component that helps you to really fulfill these complex requirements a 3 D touch probe cycle measures the rotary axes on your machine Tully automatically regardless of whether they are in the form of tables or spindle
107. 1 Work 2 1 Working with Fixed Cycles Machine specific cycles In addition to the HEIDENHAIN cycles many machine tool builders offer their own cycles in the TNC These cycles are available in a separate cycle number range Cycles 300 to 399 Machine specific cycles that are to be defined through the CYCLE DEF key Cycles 500 to 599 Machine specific touch probe cycles that are to be defined through the TOUCH PROBE key Refer to your machine manual for a description of the i specific function Sometimes machine specitic cycles use transfer parameters that HEIDENHAIN already uses in standard cycles The TNC executes DEF active cycles as soon as they are defined see also Calling cycles on page 44 It executes CALL active cycles only after they have been called see also Calling cycles on page 44 When DEF active cycles and CALL active cycles are used simultaneously it is important to prevent overwriting of transfer parameters already in use Use the following procedure As a rule always program DEF active cycles before CALL active cycles If you do want to program a DEF active cycle between the definition and call of a CALL active cycle do it only if there is no common use of specific transfer parameters 42 Using Fixed Cycles il Defining a cycle using soft keys 02 01 E DEF DRILLING THREAD i B gt The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles Press the soft key for the desired group of c
108. 125 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN a 25 DIN ISO i i 7 10 Programming Examples 7 10 amming Examples Definition of workpiece blank Tool call coarse roughing tool diameter 30 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters 90 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle definition Coarse roughing Examples D Cycle call Coarse roughing Tool change Tool call fine roughing tool diameter 15 Define the fine roughing cycle Cycle call Fine roughing Retract in the tool axis end program Contour subprogram HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 191 il Examples D z 7 10 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Drill diameter 12 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define general machining parameters 92 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Cycle definition Pilot drilling Cycle call Pilot drilling Tool change Call the tool for roughing finishing diameter 12 Cycle definition Rough out Cycle call Rough out Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program Examples D j i Examples ramming q N 94 Contour subprogram 1 left pocke
109. 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 2 358 Taper angle O469 Taper angle of contour gt Runout of thread 0474 Length of the path on which at the end of the thread the tool is lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread diameter Q460 gt Approach path O465 Length of the path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are accelerated to the required velocity The approach path is outside of the defined thread contour Overrun path O466 Length of the path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are decelerated The overrun path is within the defined thread contour gt Maximum cutting depth 0453 Maximum plunging depth perpendicular to the thread pitch gt Angle of infeed 0467 Angle for the infeed 0453 The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the thread pitch gt Type of infeed 0468 Define the type of infeed 0 Constant chip cross section the infeed decreases with the depth 1 Constant plunging depth gt Starting angle 0470 Angle of the turning spindle at which the thread start is to be made Number of starts 0475 Number of thread starts gt Number of air cuts 0476 Number of air cuts without infeed at finished thread depth Cycles Turning il 13 24 CONTOUR PARALLEL THREAD Cycle 830 Application This cycle enables you to run both face turning and longitudinal turning of threads with any form You can process sing
110. 136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D lt O za e a A 13 6 TURN SHou LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 j i M LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 13 7 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 Application This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders with plunge elements undercuts You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is less than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than 0492 CONTOUR START IN Z the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there In undercutting the TNC runs the infeed with feed rate 0478 The return movements are then each at set up clearance 1 2 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with 0463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH The TNC cuts the area between the starting position and the end point in longitudinal direction at the de
111. 18 G418 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 418 calculates the intersection of the lines connecting opposite holes and sets the datum at the intersection If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from column FMAX following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The TNC repeats steps 3 and 4 for the holes 3 and 4 6 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 The TNC calculates the datum as the intersection of the lines connecting the centers of holes 1 3 and 2 4 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below 7 f desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a Separate probing Q151 Actual value of intersection point in reference axis T CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO 0152 Actual value of intersection point in
112. 219 Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 2 greater than 2nd side length The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between blank dimension 2 and finished dimension 2 is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank side length 2 0425 Length of the stud blank parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Corner radius Q220 Radius of the stud corner Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Is left over after machining Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Angle of rotation 0224 absolute Angle by which the entire stud is rotated The center of rotation is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle is called Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stud position Q307 Position of the stud in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position Center of stud 1 Tool position Lower left corner 2 Tool position Lower right corner 3 Tool position Upper right corner 4 Tool position Upper left corner Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternati
113. 28 Desired speed for drilling Input range O to 99999 M function for coolant on 0429 M function for switching on the coolant The TNC switches the coolant on if the tool is in the hole at the deepened starting point Input range O to 999 gt M function for coolant off 0430 M function for switching off the coolant The TNC switches the coolant off if the tool is at the hole depth Input range O to 999 Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 11 Programming Examples 3 11 Programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call tool radius 3 Retract the tool Cycle definition 80 90 100 3 11 Programming M anoles Approach hole 1 spindle ON Cycle call Approach hole 2 call cycle Approach hole 3 call cycle Approach hole 4 call cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 9 0 Fixed Cycles Drilling il The drill hole coordinates are stored in the pattern definition PATTERN DEF POS and are called by the TNC with CYCL CALL PAT The tool radii are selected so that all work steps can be seen in the test graphics Program sequence E Centering tool radius 4 E Drilling tool radius 2 4 E Tapping tool radius 3 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 11 Programming Definition of workpiece blank Call the centering tool tool radius 4 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F the TNC positions to the clearance height after every cycle Defin
114. 3 Point tf 2 3 point ities 58 Using Fixed Cycles il Fixed Cycles Drilling 3 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers 9 cycles for all types of drilling operations 240 CENTERING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance optional entry of the centering diameter or centering depth 200 DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 201 REAMING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 202 BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 203 UNIVERSAL DRILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and decrementing 204 BACK BORING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 205 UNIVERSAL PECKING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking and advanced stop distance 208 BORE MILLING With automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 241 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING With automatic pre positioning to deepened starting point shaft speed and coolant definition 60 240 204 205 208 241 Page 61 Page 63 Page 65 Page 67 Page 71 Page 75 Page 79 Page 83 Page 86 Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO G240 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool is centered at the programmed feed rate F to the entered c
115. 392 Basic rotation considering 368 Bolt hole circle 161 Bolt hole circle measuring 491 Bore milling 83 Boring 67 C Centering 61 Circle measuring from inside 466 Circle measuring from outside 470 Circular pocket Roughing finishing 134 Circular slot Roughing finishing 143 Circular stud 152 Classification of results 457 Compensating workpiece misalignment By measuring two points of a line 380 Over two holes 383 Over two studs 386 Via rotary axis 389 393 Confidence interval 372 Contour cycles 170 Contour train 188 Coordinate transformation 244 Coordinate measuring a single 488 Cycle Calling 44 Defining 43 Cycles and point tables 57 Cylinder surface Contour machining 199 Ridge machining 205 Slot machining 202 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 D Datum Save in a datum table 402 Save in the preset table 402 Datum shift With datum tables 246 Within the program 245 Deepened starting point for drilling 82 87 Drilling 63 71 79 Deepened starting point 82 87 Drilling cycles 60 Dwell time 271 E External thread milling 120 F Face milling 235 FCL function 6 Feature content level 6 Floor finishing 184 H Helical thread drilling milling 116 Hole measuring 466 K Kinematic measurement 508 513 Accuracy 518 Backlash 519 H
116. 419 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 445 il G419 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 446 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis 1 3 l reference axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis SEU R I CHRROBE Nr Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traverse direction 0267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction gt Datum n
117. 471 0 state the nominal diameter For internal threads Q471 1 state the core diameter Thread pitch 0472 Pitch of the thread Thread depth 0473 Depth of the thread relative to the radius If you enter 0 the depth is assumed for a metric thread based on the pitch Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the end point including the runout of the thread Q474 Runout of thread 0474 Length of the path on which at the end of the thread the tool is lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread diameter Q460 Maximum cutting depth 0453 Maximum plunging depth in radial direction relative to the radius Angle of infeed 0467 Angle for the infeed Q453 The reference angle is formed by the perpendicular to the rotary axis LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 353 il B 2 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 354 gt Type of infeed O468 Define the type of infeed 0 Constant chip cross section the infeed decreases with the depth 1 Constant plunging depth gt Starting angle 0470 Angle of the turning spindle at which the thread start is to be made Number of starts 0475 Number of thread starts gt Number of air cuts 0476 Number of air cuts without infeed at finished thread depth m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832
118. 52 DIN ISO G252 Cycle run Use Cycle 252 CIRCULAR POCKET to completely machine circular pockets Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool plunges into the workpiece at the pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth Specify the plunging strategy with parameter O366 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out taking the overlap factor parameter 0370 and the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account At the end of the roughing operation the TNC moves the tool tangentially away from the pocket wall then moves by the set up clearance above the current infeed depth and returns from there at rapid traverse to the pocket center This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is reached Finishing 5 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the pocket walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The pocket wall is approached tangentially 6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside out The pocket floor is approached tangentially 134 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertica
119. 79 Activate the cutting limit 0 No cutting limit active 1 Cutting limit Q480 0482 Limit value for diameter 0480 X value for contour limitation diameter value Limit value Z 0482 Z value for contour limitation HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 p D lt O za e o A ik CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 k i 13 19 AXIAL RECESSING Cycle 871 13 19 AXIAL RECESSING Cycle 871 Application This cycle enables you to axially cut in right angled slots face recessing You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called The cycle processes only the area from the cycle starting point to the end point defined in the cycle 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in radial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 4 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 3 until the slot width is reached 5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point 340 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run Oo oo kh W N The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the
120. 9 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Depth at front 0358 incremental Distance between tool tip and the top surface of the workpiece for countersinking at front Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Countersinking offset at front 0359 incremental Distance by which the TNC moves the tool center away from the hole center Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance 0200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 p D O za e o A 11 Ol G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 _ G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 Mso 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 DIN ISO G265 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up c
121. 9 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made between points 1 and 4 2 and 3 Input range O to 99999 gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling The TNC performs the first step at half the programmed feed rate Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 4 FACE MILLING Cycle 232 DIN ISO G232 Cycle run Cycle 232 is used to face mill a level surface in multiple infeeds while taking the finishing allowance into account Three machining strategies are available Strategy Q389 0 Meander machining stepover outside the surface being machined Strategy 0389 1 Meander machining stepover within the surface being machined Strategy Q389 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate From the current position the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position 1 using positioning logic If the current position in the spindle axis is greater than the 2nd set up clearance the TNC positions the tool first in the machining plane and then in the spindle axis Otherwise it first moves to the 2nd set up clearance and then in the machining plane The starting point in the machining plane is offset from the edge of the workpiece by the tool radius and the safety clearance to the side The tool then moves in the spindle axis a
122. 999 Angle of incid in C axis 0421 Angle of incidence in the C axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points C axis 0422 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the C axis Input range 0 to 12 If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the calibration sphere in the plane with 4 or 3 probing points 3 probing points increase the measuring speed 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points Preset 0 1 2 3 0431 Specify whether the TNC is to set the active preset datum automatically in the center of the sphere 0 Do not set the preset automatically in the center of the sphere Set the preset manually before the start of the cycle 1 Set the preset automatically in the center of the sphere before measurement Pre position the touch probe manually over the calibration sohere before the Start of the cycle 2 Set the preset automatically in the center of the sphere after measurement Set the preset manually before the start of the cycle 3 Set the preset in the center of the sphere before and after measurement Pre position the touch probe manually over the calibration sohere before the start of the cycle Backlash angle range 0432 Here you define the angle value to be used as traverse for the measurement of the rotary ax
123. 999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum Is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system SET_UP TCHPROBE TP X Q320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set In the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1
124. 999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Path overlap factor 0370 0370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 vertical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as 0 or 90 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle Da i G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle See 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253
125. 9999 Finishing allowance for floor O4 incremental Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate Ob absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance Q6 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q7 absolute Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Inside corner radius Q8 Inside corner rounding radius entered value is referenced to the path of the tool center and is used to calculate smoother traverse motions between the contour elements Q8 is not a radius that is inserted as a separate contour element between programmed elements Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Direction of rotation Q9 Machining direction for pockets E Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island E Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and island You can check the machining parameters during a program interruption and overwrite them if required 178 Example NC blocks Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il 7 5 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 DIN ISO G121 Cycle run 1 The tool drills from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 2 Thenthe tool
126. 9999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 Dimension type deg 0 MM INCH 1 O17 The coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 eae Software Option 1 N o E D z oF 29 gt ZS ag 3 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot Milling Cycle 8 3 CYLINDER SURFACE Slot Milling Cycle 28 DIN ISO G128 Software Option 1 Cycle run This cycle enables you to program a guide notch in two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface Unlike Cycle 27 with this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are nearly parallel You can machine exactly parallel walls by using a tool that is exactly as wide as the slot The smaller the tool is with respect to the slot width the larger the distortion in circular arcs and oblique line segments To minimize this process related distortion you can define in parameter Q21 a tolerance with which the TNC machines a slot as similar
127. AIN TNC 640 G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle Gh ii j il G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO Please note while programming 130 With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position with radius compensation R0 Note parameter Q367 pocket position The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note parameter Q204 2nd set up clearance The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting position At the end of a roughing operation the TNC positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid traverse The tool is above the current pecking depth by the set up clearance Enter the set up clearance so that the tool cannot jam because of chips The TNC outputs an error message during helical plunging if the internally calculated diameter of the helix is smaller than twice the tool diameter If you are using a center cut tool you can switch off this monitoring function via the suppressPlungeErr machine parameter Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in min
128. AX FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G123 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING a 23 DIN ISO o i 7 8 SIDE FINISHING Gyele 24 DIN ISO G124 78 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 DIN ISO G124 Cycle run The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finished separately Please note while programming 186 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters 24 gt Direction of rotation Clockwise 1 O9 E amp Machining direction 1 Counterclockwise 1 Clockwise Plunging depth O10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool during plunging Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for roughing O12 Milling feed rate Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Finishing allowance for side Q14 incremental Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations If you enter Q14 0 the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G124 7 8 SIDE FINISHING oy 24 DIN ISO i i G125 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN Cle 25 DIN ISO 79 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 DIN ISO G125 Cycle run In conjunction with Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY this cycle facilitates the machining of open and closed contours Cycle 25 CONTOUR TRAIN offers
129. Actual value of length in the minor axis Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q164 Deviation of side length in reference axis Q165 Deviation of side length in minor axis 478 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 424 m Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst side length Q282 Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to OL Set 99999 9999 2nd side length Q283 Stud length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 027340279 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G424 17 8 a a RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO k il G424 17 8 m e RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO 480 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP tou
130. C derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the O parameters listed below 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis 0152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter 418 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between the touch probe and the workpiece enter a low estimate for the nominal diameter of the pocket or hole If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points The smaller the angle increment Q247 the less accuratel
131. CIFIC SCALING must not be active HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool i builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe The TNC provides a cycle for the following special purpose 3 MEASURING Cycle for defining OEM a ma Page 505 cycles oh 504 Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions il 18 2 MEASURING Cycle 3 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 3 measures any position on the workpiece in a selectable direction Unlike other measuring cycles Cycle 3 enables you to enter the measuring range SET UP and feed rate F directly Also the touch probe retracts by a definable value after determining the measured value MB 1 The touch probe moves from the current position at the entered teed rate in the defined probing direction The probing direction must be defined in the cycle as a polar angle 2 After the TNC has saved the position the touch probe stops The TNC saves the X Y Z coordinates of the probe tip center in three successive O parameters The TNC does not conduct any length or radius compensations You define the number of the first result parameter in the cycle 3 Finally the TNC moves the touch probe back by that value against the probing direction that you defined in the parameter MB M gt lt cc Y lt lt LLI N 00 Please note while programming HEIDE
132. Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the stud Enter a value that is more likely to be too large than too small Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G413 16 7 DATUM _ OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO j il G413 16 7 DATUM Mb OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO 424 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be
133. Cycle 220 is DEF active which means that Cycle 220 automatically calls the last defined fixed cycle If you combine Cycle 220 with one of the fixed cycles 200 to 209 and 251 to 267 the set up clearance workpiece surface and 2nd set up clearance that you defined in Cycle 220 will be effective for the selected fixed cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G220 DIN ISO 6 2 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 22 j il G220 6 2 POLAR PATTERN Cycle J DIN ISO Cycle parameters 228 se e 162 Center in 1st axis 0216 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0217 absolute Center of the pitch circle in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Pitch circle diameter Q244 Diameter of the pitch circle Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle Q245 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the first machining operation on the pitch circle Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stopping angle Q246 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the starting point for the last machining operation on the pitch circle does not apply to full circles Do not enter the same value for the stopping angle and starting angle If you enter the stopping angle greater than the starting angle machining will be carried out counterclockwise otherw
134. Datum setting Manually by touch oft Controlled with a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual chapter 2 Automatically with a HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe see the Touch Probe Cycles User s Manual chapter 3 4 Start the part program in the operating mode Program Run Full Sequence 5 Manual Operation mode Use the 3 D ROT soft key to set the TILT WWORKING PLANE function to INACTIVE Enter an angular value of 0 for each rotary axis in the menu HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G80 Software Option 1 DIN ISO 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle j il 11 10 Programming Examples Program sequence E Program the coordinate transformations in the main program E Machining within a subprogram 11 10 Programming Examples Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Shift datum to center Call milling operation Set label for program section repeat Rotate by 45 incremental Call milling operation Return jump to LBL 10 repeat the milling operation six times Reset the rotation Reset the datum shift 66 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il N HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Retract in the tool axis end program Subprogram 1 Define milling operation 11 10 Programming Examples o i 11 10 Programming Examples 268 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il 12 1 Fundamentals 12 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides fou
135. EEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO G241 86 Cycle run 86 Please note while programming 86 Cycle parameters 87 3 11 Programming Examples 89 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 il 4 1 Fundamentals 94 Overview 94 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a Floating Tap Holder Cycle 206 DIN ISO G206 95 Cycle run 95 Please note while programming 95 Cycle parameters 96 4 3 RIGID TAPPING without a Floating Tap Holder NEW Cycle 207 DIN ISO G207 97 Cycle run 97 Please note while programming 98 Cycle parameters 99 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 DIN ISO G209 100 Cycle run 100 Please note while programming 101 Cycle parameters 102 4 5 Fundamentals of Thread Milling 103 Prerequisites 103 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 105 Cycle run 105 Please note while programming 106 Cycle parameters 107 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 DIN ISO G268 108 Cycle run 108 Please note while programming 109 Cycle parameters 110 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 DIN ISO G264 112 Cycle run 112 Please note while programming 113 Cycle parameters 114 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 DIN ISO G265 116 Cycle run 116 Please note while programming 117 Cycle parameters 118 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle
136. ESSING Cycle 871 340 Application 340 Roughing cycle run 340 Finishing cycle run 341 Please note while programming 341 Cycle parameters 342 13 20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 343 Application 343 Roughing cycle run 343 Finishing cycle run 344 Please note while programming 344 Cycle parameters 345 13 21 RECESSING CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 347 Application 347 Roughing cycle run 347 Finishing cycle run 348 Please note while programming 348 Cycle parameters 349 13 22 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 351 Application 351 Cycle run 351 Please note while programming 352 Cycle parameters 353 13 23 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 305 Application 355 Cycle parameters 357 13 24 CONTOUR PARALLEL THREAD Cycle 830 359 Application 300 Please note while programming 360 Cycle parameters 361 13 25 Example program 303 14 1 General Information about Touch Probe Cycles 368 Method of function 368 Consideration of a basic rotation in the Manual Operation mode 368 Cycles in the Manual and El Handwheel modes 368 Touch probe cycles for automatic operation 369 14 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles 371 Maximum traverse to touch point DIST in touch probe table 371 Set up clearance to touch point SET_UP in touch p
137. Editing mode of operation Press the PGM MGT key to call the file manager MGT Display the datum tables Press the SELECT TYPE and SHOW D soft keys Select the desired table or enter a new file name Edit the file The soft key row comprises the following functions for editing Go to beginning of table BEGIN Select end of table Go to previous page Go to next page END PAGE PAGE Insert line only possible at end of table INSERT Delete line on Find FIND Go to beginning of line BEGIN Go to end of line mo Copy the current value copy Insert the copied value PASTE Add the entered number of lines datums to the end APPEND of the table N LINES HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G53 tum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO 11 3 DATUM SHIFT with Da i il G53 atum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO lt s x L V gt lt O Configuring the datum table If you do not wish to define a datum for an active axis press the DEL key Then the TNC clears the numerical value from the corresponding input field number 555343 in the MOD menu The TNC then offers the EDIT FORMAT soft key if a table is selected When you press this soft key the TNC opens a pop up window where the properties are shown for each column of the selected table Any changes made only affect the open table You can change the properties of tables
138. F CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 420 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the center of the pocket Input range 0 to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the pocket center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9
139. IDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G122 7 6 ROUGH OUT a 22 DIN ISO o i G123 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING ie 23 DIN ISO 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 DIN ISO G123 Cycle run The tool approaches the machining plane smoothly on a vertically tangential arc if there is sufficient room If there is not enough room the TNC moves the tool to depth vertically The tool then clears the finishing allowance remaining from rough out Please note while programming finishing The starting point depends on the available The TNC automatically calculates the starting point for space in the pocket The approaching radius for pre positioning to the final depth is permanently defined and independent of the plunging angle of the tool Danger of collision After executing an SL cycle you must program the first traverse motion in the working plane with both coordinate data e g L X 80 Y 0 RO FMAX 184 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the Ld tool during plunging Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for roughing O12 Milling feed rate Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Retraction feed rate O208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting after machining If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the teed rate in Q12 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FM
140. Measuring the Tool Length Cycle 31 or 481 DIN ISO G481 534 Cycle run 534 Please note while programming 535 Cycle parameters 535 20 4 Measuring the Tool Radius Cycle 32 or 482 DIN ISO G482 536 Cycle run 536 Please note while programming 536 Cycle parameters 537 20 5 Measuring Tool Length and Radius Cycle 33 or 483 DIN ISO 6483 538 Cycle run 538 Please note while programming 538 Cycle parameters 539 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 35 il a 1 1 Introduction Frequently recurring machining cycles that comprise several working steps are stored in the TNC memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and several special functions are also available as cycles Most cycles use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific functions that are required in several cycles always have the same number For example Q200 is always assigned the set up clearance Q202 the plunging depth etc 1 1 Introduct 38 Fundamentals Overviews 1 2 Available Cycle Groups Overview of fixed cycles The soft key row shows the available groups of wad cycles Cycles for pecking reaming boring and counterboring Cycles for tapping thread cutting and thread milling Cycles for milling pockets studs and slots Cycles for producing hole patterns such as circular or linear point patterns SL Subcontour List cycles which allow the contour parallel machini
141. NC machines the area between the starting position and the end point in the plane direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point 310 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC traverses the tool in the Z coordinate by the set up clearance Q460 The movement is performed at rapid traverse The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The TNC finishes the finished part contour at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point Please note while programming radius compensation RO before the cycle call Program a positioning block to the starting position with The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 i il ist TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 Cycle parameters gt Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Onl
142. NHAIN TNC 640 505 il 18 2 MEASURING Cycle 3 Cycle parameters 506 Parameter number for result Enter the number of the Q parameter to which you want the TNC to assign the first measured coordinate X The values Y and Z are in the immediately following O parameters Input range O to 1999 gt Probing axis Enter the axis in whose direction the probe is to move and confirm with the ENT key Input range X Y or Z Probing angle Angle measured from the defined probing axis in which the touch probe is to move Confirm with ENT Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 Maximum measuring range Enter the maximum distance from the starting point by which the touch probe is to move Confirm with ENT Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for measurement Enter the measuring teed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 3000 000 gt Maximum retraction distance raverse path in the direction opposite the probing direction after the stylus was deflected The TNC returns the touch probe to a point no farther than the starting point so that there can be no collision Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Reference system 0 ACT 1 REF Specify whether the probing direction and the result of measurement are to be referenced to the actual coordinate system ACT can be shifted or rotated or to the machine coordinate system REF 0 Probe in the current system and save measurement result in the ACT system
143. RANSVERSE Cycle 820 TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 AXIAL RECESSING Cycle 871 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 RECESSING CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 THREAD EXTENDED Cycle 832 CONTOUR PARALLEL THREAD Cycle 830 Page 286 Page 310 Page 313 Page 317 Page 321 Page 325 Page 306 Page 329 Page 332 Page 336 Page 340 Page 343 Page 347 Page 351 Page 355 Page 359 13 1 Turning Cycles Software Option 50 i il 13 1 Turning Cycles Software Option 50 Working with turning cycles You can only use turning cycles in Turning mode FUNCTION MODE TURN In turning cycles the TNC takes into account the cutting geometry T0 RS P ANGLE T ANGLE of the tool so that damage to the defined contour elements is prevented The TNC outputs a warning if complete machining of the contour with the active tool is not possible You can use the turning cycles both for inside and outside machining Depending upon the specific cycle the TNC detects the machining position inside outside machining via the starting position or tool position when the cycle is called In some cycles you can also enter the machining position directly in the cycle After modifying the machining position check the tool position and ro
144. RDINATE SET UP CLEARANCE 50 CLEARANCE HEIGHT 0 ROUNDING RADIUS 09s ROTATIONAL DIRECTION 1 14 CALL LBL 2 15 CYCL DEF 22 ROUGH OUT 43 th Fixed s ing wi 2 1 Work th Fixed Pies ing wi 2 1 Work Calling cycles Prerequisites The following data must always be programmed before a cycle call BLK FORM for graphic display needed only for test graphics Tool call Direction of spindle rotation M functions M3 M4 Cycle definition CYCL DEF For some cycles additional prerequisites must be observed They are detailed in the descriptions for each cycle The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program These cycles cannot and must not be called Cycle 220 for point patterns on circles and Cycle 221 for point patterns on lines SL Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY SL Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 32 TOLERANCE Coordinate transformation cycles Cycle 9 DWELL TIME All touch probe cycles You can call all other cycles with the functions described as follows Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL The CYCL CALL function calls the most recently defined fixed cycle once The starting point of the cycle is the position that was programmed last before the CYCL CALL block CYCL To program the cycle call press the CYCL CALL key CALL Press the CYCL CALL M soft key to enter a cycle call If necessary enter the miscellaneous function M for example M3 to sw
145. RKPC BLANK SIDE 2 Lu Q220 0 CORNER RADIUS O Q368 0 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE S Q224 0 ANGLE OF ROTATION Q367 0 STUD POSITION Q207 250 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q201 30 DEPTH a Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH 00 Q206 250 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG LO Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 20 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP 8 L X 50 Y 50 RO FMAX M99 Call CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 9 L Z 250 RO FMAX M6 Tool change HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 j il Call tool slotting mill Define SLOT cycle No pre positioning in X Y required Starting point for second slot 5 8 Progra ino Examples Call SLOT cycle Retract in the tool axis end program 58 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Fundamentals 6 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC provides two cycles for machining point patterns directly 220 POLAR PATTERN 220 Page 161 221 CARTESIAN PATTERN Page 164 You can combine Cycle 220 and Cycle 221 with the following fixed cycles Cycle 200 Cycle 201 Cycle 202 Cycle 203 Cycle 204 Cycle 205 Cycle 206 Cycle 207 Cycle 208 Cycle 209 Cycle 240 Cycle 251 Cycle 252 Cycle 253 Cycle 254 Cycle 256 Cycle 257 Cycle 262 Cycle 263 Cycle 264 Cycle 265 Cycle 267 160 If you have to machine irregular point patterns use CYCL CALL PAT see Point
146. Retract in the tool axis end program Fixed Cycles Drilling il a er 4 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers 8 cycles for all types of threading operations 206 TAPPING NEW Page 95 With a floating tap holder with automatic AD pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 207 RIGID TAPPING NEW 207 RT Page 97 Without a floating tap holder with automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance 209 TAPPING W CHIP BREAKING zoa RT Page 100 Without a floating tap holder with Z2 automatic pre positioning 2nd set up clearance chip breaking 262 THREAD MILLING Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled material Page 105 N o T 263 THREAD MILLING CNTSNKG Cycle for milling a thread in pre drilled material and machining a countersunk chamfer N on T Page 108 264 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle for drilling into solid material with subsequent milling of the thread with a tool N oO T Page 112 265 HEL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle for milling the thread into solid material N m z Page 116 267 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle for milling an external thread and machining a countersunk chamfer Page 116 F 94 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 2 TAPPING NEW with a Floating Tap Holder Cycle 206 DIN ISO G206 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiec
147. Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4 or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D Z O za e a A 16 7 DATUM _ OUTSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 413 DIN ISO G413 A N Ol 16 8 DATUM FROM OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO G414 G414 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 414 finds the intersection of two lines and defines it as the datum If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the first touch point 1 see figure at upper right The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the respective traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed third measuring point 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes
148. Tables on page 54 to develop point tables More regular point patterns are available with the PATTERN DEF function see Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF on page 46 DRILLING REAMING BORING UNIVERSAL DRILLING BACK BORING UNIVERSAL PECKING TAPPING NEW with a floating tap holder RIGID TAPPING without a floating tap holder NEW BORE MILLING TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING CENTERING RECTANGULAR POCKET CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING SLOT MILLING CIRCULAR SLOT can only be combined with Cycle 221 RECTANGULAR STUD CIRCULAR STUD THREAD MILLING THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING THREAD DRILLING MILLING HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Fixed Cycles Pattern Definitions il 6 2 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 220 DIN ISO G220 Cycle run 1 The TNC moves the tool at rapid traverse from its current position to the starting point for the first machining operation Sequence 2 Move to the 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches on a straight line or circular arc the Starting point for the next machining operation The tool stops at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations have been executed Please note while programming
149. URN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 ols Application ot Fe Roughing cycle run 313 Finishing cycle run 314 Please note while programming 314 Cycle parameters 315 13 13 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 Se Application 317 Roughing cycle run 317 Finishing cycle run 318 Please note while programming 318 Cycle parameters 319 13 14 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 321 Application 321 Roughing cycle run 321 Finishing cycle run 322 Please note while programming 322 Cycle parameters 323 13 15 TURN CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 325 Application 325 Roughing cycle run 325 Finishing cycle run 326 Please note while programming 326 Cycle parameters 327 13 16 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 329 Application 329 Roughing cycle run 329 Finishing cycle run 330 Please note while programming 330 Cycle parameters 331 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 26 13 17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 332 Application 332 Roughing cycle run 332 Finishing cycle run 333 Please note while programming 300 Cycle parameters 334 13 18 RECESSING CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 336 Application 336 Roughing cycle run 336 Finishing cycle run 337 Please note while programming 337 Cycle parameters 338 13 19 AXIAL REC
150. _UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The first probing is always in the positive direction of the programmed axis 3 Ifyou enter an offset for the second measurement the TNC then moves the touch probe if required at clearance height to the next Starting point 2 and probes the second touch point If the nominal length is large the TNC moves the touch probe to the second touch point at rapid traverse If you do not enter an offset the TNC measures the width in the exact opposite direction 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviation in the following OQ parameters Q156 Actual value of measured length 0157 Actual value of the centerline Q166 Deviation of the measured length Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis 482 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters Starting point in 1st axis 0328 absolute Starting point for probing in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis 0329 absolute Starting point for probing in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Offset for 2nd measurement Q310 incremental Dista
151. ace coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Path overlap factor 0370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 vertical plunging The TNC plunges perpendicularly regardless of the plunging angle ANGLE defined in the tool table E 1 helical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E 2 reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 Otherwise the TNC generates an error message Ihe reciprocation length depends on the plunging angle As a minimum value the TNC uses twice the tool diameter gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G251 m x D 3 p D lt O za e a A 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle Gh dii k i G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle os MN ISO 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 2
152. ameter for the status of the measurement the new cycles use the fixed parameter Q199 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 20 1 Fundamentals f il 20 1 Fundamentals Setting the machine parameters machine parameters defined in ProbeSettings gt Before you start work with the TT cycles inspect all CfgToolMeasurement and CfgTTRoundStylus The TNC uses the feed rate for probing defined in probingFeed when measuring a tool at standstill When measuring a rotating tool the TNC automatically calculates the spindle speed and feed rate for probing The spindle speed is calculated as follows n maxPeriphSpeedMeas r 0 0063 where n Spindle speed rom maxPeriphSpeedMeas Maximum permissible cutting speed in m min r Active tool radius in mm The feed rate for probing is calculated from v meas tolerance n where V Feed rate for probing in mm min Measuring tolerance Measuring tolerance mm depending on maxPeriphSpeedMeas n Spindle speed rpm probingFeedCalc determines the calculation of the probing feed rate probingFeedCalc ConstantTolerance The measuring tolerance remains constant regardless of the tool radius With very large tools however the feed rate for probing is reduced to zero The smaller you set the maximum permissible rotational soeed maxPeriphSpeedMeas and the permissible tolerance measureTolerancel the sooner you will encounter this effect probingFeedCalc VariableTolerance The measu
153. amming User s Manual 892 903 xx ID of User s Manual for DIN ISO programming 892 909 xx Software options The TNC 640 features various software options that can be enabled by your machine tool builder Each option is to be enabled separately and contains the following respective functions TNC Model Software and Features Cylinder surface interpolation Cycles 27 28 and 29 Feed rate in mm min for rotary axes M116 Tilting the machining plane plane functions Cycle 19 and 3D ROT soft key in the Manual Operation mode Circle in 3 axes with tilted working plane 5 axis interpolation 3 D machining M128 Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM FUNCTION TCPM Maintaining the position of the tool tip when positioning with tilted axes TCPM in selectable modes M144 Compensating the machine s kinematic configuration for ACTUAL NOMINAL positions at end of block LN blocks 3 D compensation Communication with external PC applications over COM component Function for enabling the conversational languages Slovenian Slovak Norwegian Latvian Estonian Korean Turkish Romanian Lithuanian Input resolution and display step For linear axes to 0 01 um Rotary axes to 0 00001 Double speed control loops are used primarily for high speed spindles as well as for linear motors and torque motors HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TNC Model Software and Features Touch probe cycles f
154. and TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for use of this cycle Oriented spindle stops are required for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probes with infrared transmission The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 or M20 depending on the machine If you program M19 or M20 without having defined Cycle 13 the TNC positions the machine tool spindle to an angle that has been set by the machine manufacturer see your machine manual Please note while programming Cycle parameters Cycle 13 is used internally for Cycles 202 204 and 209 Please note that if required you must program Cycle 13 again in your NC program after one of the machining cycles mentioned above Te Angle of orientation Enter the angle referenced to il the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 0000 to 360 0000 274 Example NC blocks Cycles Special Functions il 12 5 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 Cycle function Machine and TNC must be specially prepared by the O machine tool builder for use of this cycle With the entries in Cycle 32 you can influence the result of HSC machining with respect to accuracy surface definition and speed inasmuch as the TNC has been adapted to the machine s characteristics The TNC automatically smoothens the contour betwe
155. and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 SEIUPiCErP ROBE TR Q320 MaN GA Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the q measuring points lt p 0 Move at measuring height between measuring D points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Execute basic rotation Q304 Definition of whether the TNC should compensate workpiece misalignment with a basic rotation 0 No basic rotation 1 Basic rotation Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the corner If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum Is on the corner Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 03372 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the dete
156. and the cylinder surface Input range O0 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius O16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 Dimension type deg 0 MM INCH 1 O17 The coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 gt Ridge width Q20 Width of the ridge to be machined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 a HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 20 G129 Software Option 1 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge ai 29 DIN ISO 00 on J es Q 3 z 5 Q rTi x Q 3 D V Note E Machine with B head and C table E Cylinder centered on rotary table Datum is on the underside in the center of the rotary table 5 Programming Examples Tool call Diameter 7 Retract the tool Pre position tool at rotary table center Positioning Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters N 08 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Pre position rotary table spindle ON
157. and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then returns to the current infeed depth and moves in the direction of the next stopping point 2 The milling process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the tool plunges to the next machining depth In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance 236 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il Please note while programming Enter the 2nd set up clearance in 0204 such that no collision with the workpiece or the fixtures can occur If the starting point in the 3rd axis Q227 and the end point in the 3rd axis Q386 are entered as equal values the TNC does not run the cycle depth 0 has been programmed Cycle parameters 232 Machining strategy 0 1 2 Q389 Specify how the TNC is to machine the surface 0 Meander machining stepover at positioning feed rate outside the surface to be machined 1 Meander machining stepover at feed rate for milling within the surface to be machined 2 Line by line machining retraction and stepover at the positioning feed rate Starting point in 1st axis Q225 absolute Starting point coordinate
158. ange 0 to 99999 9999 gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 0214 Determine the direction in which the TNC displaces the tool by the off center distance after spindle orientation Input of O is not permitted 1 Retract tool in the negative ref axis direction 2 Retract tool in the negative minor axis direction 3 Retract tool in the positive ref axis direction 4 Retract tool in the positive minor axis direction gt Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before it is plunged into or retracted from the bore hole Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO G205 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface If you enter a deepened starting point the TNC moves at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate If pr
159. arameters listed with every cycle 2 BLK FORM 0 2 x 100 yeso 240 description St imee During cycle definition the TNC also shows the result parameters for seas oleae see the respective cycle in a help graphic see figure at upper right The O27i 420 2N0 CENTER 2O AKIE highlighted result parameter belongs to that input parameter corso nest ROTATION ANG ae LL 0397 40 SE TO ZERO i q Classification of results a e a Gose co SM0 PNT IM 187 AXIS For some cycles you can inquire the status of measuring results casi MEASURING HEIN through the globally effective Q parameters Q180 to Q182 oe ee Q304 0 BASIC ROTATION Q305 0 NUMBER IN TABLE _Class of results Parameter value __ Measurement results are within tolerance 0180 1 Rework is required Q181 1 Scrap Q182 1 The TNC sets the rework or scrap marker as soon as one of the measuring values falls outside of tolerance To determine which of the measuring results lies outside of tolerance check the measuring log or compare the respective measuring results 0150 to Q160 with their limit values In Cycle 427 the TNC assumes that you are measuring an outside dimension stud However you can correct the status of the measurement by entering the correct maximum and minimum dimension together with the probing direction defined any tolerance values or maximum minimum The TNC also sets the status markers if you have not dimensions HEIDENHAIN
160. at any straight surface on the workpiece describes with respect to the reference axis of the working plane 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the programmed starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured angle in the following Q parameter Q150 The measured angle is referenced to the reference axis of the machining plane Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis If touch probe axis measuring axis set Q263 equal to Q265 if the angle about the A axis is to be measured set Q263 not equal to Q265 if the angle is to be measured about the B axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G420 17 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO j il G420 17 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 420 C 464 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane I
161. ate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point 302 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming 13 9 j CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 303 il tN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 13 9 TU Cycle parameters 304 Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Reverse contour 0499 Define the machining direction of the contour 0 The contour is machined in the programmed direction 1 The contour is machined Inversely to the program
162. ated touch point the TNC is to pre position the touch probe The smaller the value you enter the more exactly you must define the touch point position In many touch probe cycles you can also define a set up clearance that is added to SET _UP Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction TRACK in touch probe table To increase measuring accuracy you can use TRACK ON to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe direction before every probe process In this way the stylus is always deflected in the same direction If you change TRACK ON you must recalibrate the touch probe HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 i i You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles o il 14 2 You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles Touch trigger probe probing feed rate F in touch probe table In F you define the feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FMAX In FMAX you define the feed rate at which the TNC pre positions the touch probe or positions it between measuring points Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning F_PREPOS in touch probe table In F_PREPOS you define whether the TNC is to position the touch probe at the feed rate defined in FMAX or at rapid traverse Input value FMAX_ PROBE Position at feed rate from FMAX Input value FMAX MACHINE Pre position at rapid traverse Multiple measurements To increa
163. bsolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for countersinking 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D lt O za e a A 11 a G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 _ G264 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 Mso 4 8 THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 264 DIN ISO G264 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface Drilling 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate for plunging 3 If you have programmed chip breaking the tool then retracts by the entered retraction value If you are working without chip breaking the tool is moved at rapid traverse to the set up clearance and then at FMAX to the entered starting position above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4
164. bsolute Center of the ridge in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Width of ridge 0311 incremental Width of the ridge regardless of its position in the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis l 1st axis 2 2nd axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance Q320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET _UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the ridge center If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the slot center Input range O to 2999 New datum 0405 absolute Coordinate in the measuring axis at which the TNC should set the calculated ridge center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Se MOC miele I Touch Probe Cycles Au
165. by the tool diameter in the positive tool axis direction and then back to starting point 1 4 At the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool back to the last traversed Z value 5 Then the TNC moves the tool in all three axes from point 1 in the direction of point 4 to the next line 6 From this point the tool moves to the stopping point on this pass The TNC calculates the end point from point 2 and a movement in the direction of point 3 7 Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed 8 At the end of the cycle the tool is positioned above the highest programmed point in the spindle axis offset by the tool diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G231 10 3 RULED a Cycle 231 DIN ISO i il G231 10 3 RULED suffhce Cycle 231 DIN ISO Cutting motion The starting point and therefore the milling direction is selectable because the TNC always moves from point 1 to point 2 and in the total movement from point 1 2 to point 3 4 You can program point 1 at any corner of the surface to be machined If you are using an end mill for the machining operation you can optimize the surface finish in the following ways A shaping cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 greater than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for slightly inclined surfaces A drawing cut spindle axis coordinate of point 1 smaller than spindle axis coordinate of point 2 for steep surfaces When milling twisted surfaces
166. calculated touch point the TNC is to pre position the touch probe The smaller the value you enter the more exactly you must define the touch point position In many touch probe cycles you can also define a set up clearance that is added to the SET_UP machine parameter Defining speed with pre positioning Pre positioning with speed from FMAX FMAX PROBE Pre positioning with machine rapid traverse FMAX MACHINE To Increase measuring accuracy you can use TRACK ON to have an infrared touch probe oriented in the programmed probe direction before every probe process In this way the stylus is always deflected in the same direction ON Perform spindle tracking OFF Do not perform spindle tracking HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Selection of touch probe TS center misalignmt ref axis mm TS center misalignmt aux axis mm Spindle angle for calibration Probing feed rate mm min Rapid traverse in probing cycle mm min Maximum measuring path mm Set up clearance mm Pre positioning at rap traverse ENT NO ENT Orient touch probe cycles Yes ENT No NOENT o il 14 3 Touch Probe Table 14 3 Touch Probe Table 376 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment i 15 1 Fundamentals 15 1 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING must not be a
167. call the cycle Retract the tool Tilt back cancel the PLANE function End of program Contour subprogram Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 oe Examples j i Notes E Cylinder centered on rotary table E Machine with B head and C table Datum at center of rotary table E Description of the midpoint path in the contour subprogram 5 Programming Examples Tool call tool axis Z diameter 7 Retract the tool Position tool at rotary table center Positioning Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Remachining active 10 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il N oe Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Pre position rotary table spindle ON call the cycle Retract the tool Tilt back cancel the PLANE function End of program Contour subprogram description of the midpoint path Data for the rotary axis are entered in mm Q17 1 i i 5 Programming Examples 212 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles with Complex Contour Formula Fundamentals SL cycles and the complex contour formula enable you to form complex contours by combining subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours geometry data as separate programs In this way any subcontour can be used any number of times The TNC calculates the complete contour from the selected subco
168. can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below 5 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q166 Actual value of measured slot width Q157 Actual value of the centerline 16 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 403 il G408 5 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a low estimate for the slot width If the slot width and the safe
169. ch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Max size limit 1st side length 0284 Maximum permissible length of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 1st side length 0285 Minimum permissible length of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Max size limit 2nd side length Q286 Maximum permissible width of the stud Inout range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 2nd side length Q287 Minimum permissible width of the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Q274 0280 027329279 EOR IE EREDE TP 0320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR424 TXT by default i
170. cies between the actual and nominal positions of rotary axes in multiple definitions N 62 Define the spatial angle for calculation of the compensation Position the rotary axes by using values calculated by Cycle 19 Activate compensation for the spindle axis Activate compensation for the working plane Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Automatic positioning of rotary axes If the rotary axes are positioned automatically in Cycle 19 m The TNC can position only controlled axes E In order for the tilted axes to be positioned you must enter a feed rate and a set up clearance in addition to the tilting angles during cycle definition E Use only preset tools the full tool length must be defined E The position of the tool tip as referenced to the workpiece surface remains nearly unchanged after tilting E The TNC performs the tilt at the last programmed feed rate The maximum feed rate that can be reached depends on the complexity of the swivel head or tilting table Example NC blocks G80 Software Option 1 Define the angle for calculation of the compensation Also define the feed rate and the clearance Activate compensation for the spindle axis Activate compensation for the working plane DIN ISO 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 263 il G80 Software Option 1 O 2 Z A 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle Position display in the tilted system On activation of Cycle 19 the
171. cle parameters 165 6 4 Programming Examples 166 16 7 1 SL Cycles 170 Fundamentals 1 70 Overview 171 7 2 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Cycle 14 DIN ISO G37 172 Please note while programming 172 Cycle parameters 172 7 3 Overlapping Contours 173 Fundamentals 173 Subprograms overlapping pockets 174 Area of inclusion 175 Area of exclusion 176 Area of intersection 176 7 4 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 DIN ISO G120 177 Please note while programming 177 Cycle parameters 178 7 5 PILOT DRILLING Cycle 21 DIN ISO G121 179 Cycle run 179 Please note while programming 179 Cycle parameters 180 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 181 Cycle run 181 Please note while programming 182 Cycle parameters 163 7 7 FLOOR FINISHING Cycle 23 DIN ISO G123 184 Cycle run 184 Please note while programming 184 Cycle parameters 185 7 8 SIDE FINISHING Cycle 24 DIN ISO G124 186 Cycle run 186 Please note while programming 186 Cycle parameters 187 7 9 CONTOUR TRAIN Cycle 25 DIN ISO G125 188 Cycle run 188 Please note while programming 188 Cycle parameters 189 7 10 Programming Examples 190 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 8 1 Fundamentals 198 Overview of cylindrical surface cycles 198 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN ISO G127
172. cles il Defining a pitch circle O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the X axis Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis Bolt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining position Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Stepping angle end angle Incremental polar angle between two machining positions You can enter a positive or negative value As an alternative you can enter the end angle switch via soft key Number of repetitions Total number of machining positions on the circle Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks Ce Sa G Programming TNC nc_prog PGM PAT H O BEGIN PGM PAT MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 200 2Z 0 OOL CALL 5 Z 2000 L 24100 RO FMAX M3 6 END PGM PAT MM MAN A 06 53 53 EF LLI E A INITION 2 2 Pattern Def 2 3 point Miles 2 3 Point Tables Application You should create a point table whe
173. column of the tool table TOOL T 0 Centering based on the entered depth 1 Centering based on the entered diameter gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and centering bottom tip of centering taper Only effective if O343 0 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Diameter algebraic sign 0344 Centering diameter Only effective if O343 1 is defined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during centering in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 m X D 3 O T e zA A Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool drills to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 The TNC returns the tool at FMAX to the set up clearance dwells there if a dwell time was entered and the
174. compensates the calculated value As an alternative you can also compensate the determined misalignment by rotating the rotary table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from column FMAX following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle If you want to compensate the misalignment by rotating the rotary table the TNC will automatically use the following rotary axes C for tool axis Z B for tool axis Y A for tool axis X HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G401 15 3 BASIC i ii from Two Holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO j il Cycle parameters qF a01 lst hole Center in lst axis Q268 absolute g G Center of the first hole in the reference axis of the a working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Ist
175. connection with the tool A axis Z The following machining patterns are available POINT POINT Page 48 Definition of up to any 9 machining positions ROW ROU Page 49 Definition of a single row straight or Ea rotated PATTERN PATTERN Page 50 Definition of a single pattern straight rotated or distorted FRAME FRAME Page 51 Definition of a single frame straight rotated or distorted CIRCLE CIRCLE Page 52 Definition of a full circle PITCH CIRCLE PT Page 53 Definition of a pitch circle 46 Using Fixed Cycles il Entering PATTERN DEF SPEC FCT CONTOUR POINT MACHINING PATTERN DEF ROW a2 oe Select the Programming and Editing operating mode Press the special functions key Select the functions for contour and point machining Open a PATTERN DEF block Select the desired machining pattern e g a single row Enter the required definitions and confirm each entry with the ENT key Using PATTERN DEF As soon as you have entered a pattern definition you can call it with the CYCL CALL PAT function see Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT on page 44 The TNC then performs the most recently defined machining cycle on the machining pattern you defined A machining pattern remains active until you define a new one or select a point table with the SEL PATTERN function You can use the mid program startup function to select any point at which you want to start o
176. considerable advantages over machining a contour using positioning blocks The TNC monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface blemishes It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of the contour before execution If the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling The type of milling even remains effective when the contours are mirrored The tool can traverse back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough milling and finish milling operations Please note while programming determines the working direction If you program The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed The TNC takes only the first label of Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY into account The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle is limited You can program up to 16384 contour elements in one SL cycle Cycle 20 CONTOUR DATA is not required The miscellaneous functions M109 and M110 are not effective when machining a contour with Cycle 25 Danger of collision To avoid collisions Do not program positions in incremental dimensions immediately after Cycle 25 since they are referenced to the position of the tool at the end of the cycle Move the tool to defined absolute po
177. contours Subprogram numbers that you enter in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY You can program up to 16384 contour elements in one The memory capacity for programming the cycle is limited cycle SL cycles conduct comprehensive and complex internal calculations as well as the resulting machining operations For safety reasons always run a graphical program test before machining This is a simple way of finding out whether the TNC calculated program will provide the desired results Characteristics of the subprograms E Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcontour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call The TNC recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RR E The TNC recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour for example if you machine the contour clockwise with radius compensation RL E The subprograms must not contain spindle axis coordinates E Always program both axes in the first block of the subprogram E f you use Q parameters then only perform the calculations and assignments within the affected contour subprograms Characteristics of the fixed cycles E The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set up clearance before a cycle E Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the
178. ctive HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool i builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe The TNC provides five cycles that enable you to measure and compensate workpiece misalignment In addition you can reset a basic rotation with Cycle 404 400 BASIC ROTATION Automatic 400 Page 380 measurement using two points m Compensation via basic rotation 401 ROT OF 2 HOLES Automatic 401 Page 383 measurement using two holes Compensation via basic rotation 402 ROT OF 2 STUDS Automatic 402 Page 386 measurement using two studs Compensation via basic rotation 403 ROT IN ROTARY AXIS Automatic 403 Page 389 measurement using two points Compensation by turning the table 405 ROT IN C AXIS Automatic a05 Page 393 alignment of an angular offset between 6i a hole center and the positive Y axis Compensation via table rotation 404 SET BASIC ROTATION Setting any R Page 392 404 basic rotation en 378 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment For Cycles 400 401 and 402 you can define through parameter Q307 Default setting for basic rotation whether the measurement result is to be corrected by a known angle see figure at right This enables you to measure the basic rotation against any straigh
179. cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe Refer to your machine tool manual Q Method of function Whenever the TNC runs a touch probe cycle the 3 D touch probe approaches the workpiece in one linear axis This is also true during an active basic rotation or with a tilted working plane The machine tool builder determines the probing feed rate in a machine parameter see Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles later in this chapter When the probe stylus contacts the workpiece the 3 D touch probe transmits a signal to the TNC the coordinates of the probed position are stored the touch probe stops moving and returns to its starting position at rapid traverse If the stylus is not deflected within a defined distance the TNC displays an error message distance DIST from touch probe table Consideration of a basic rotation in the Manual Operation mode During probing the TNC considers an active basic rotation and approaches the workpiece at an angle Cycles in the Manual and El Handwheel modes In the Manual Operation and El Handwheel modes the TNC provides touch probe cycles that allow you to Calibrate the touch probe Compensate workpiece misalignment Set datums 368 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Touch probe cycles for automatic operation Besides the touch probe cycles which you can us
180. d that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool in the center of the pocket at rapid traverse to the first plunging depth Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Cycle parameters 251 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined lst side length Q218 incremental Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length 0219 incremental Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Corner radius Q220 Radius of the pocket corner If you have entered 0 here the TNC assumes that the corner radius is equal to the tool radius Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side Q368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Angle of rotation Q224 absolute Angle by which the entire pocket is rotated The center of rotation is the position at which the tool is located when the cycle is called Input ran
181. d workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height Q301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the slot center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the slot center Inout range O to 2999 New datum 0405 absolute Coordinate in the measuring axis at which the TNC should set the calculated slot center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system Is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G408 5 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO o il G408 _ SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO 406 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the to
182. datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set In the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G411 m X D 3 p D Z O za e o A 16 5 DATUM i ahha OF RECTANGLE Cycle 411 DIN ISO A G412 16 6 oT INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO 16 6 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO G412 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 412 finds the center of a circular pocket or of a hole and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TN
183. datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 G414 m X D 3 O T e zA A OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO TE 2 lt x m a 430 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO G415 G415 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 415 finds the intersection of two lines and defines it as the datum If desired the TNC can also enter the intersection into a datum table or preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the first touch point 1 see figure at upper right that you have defined in the cycle The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the respective traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The probing direction is derived from the number by which you identify the corner 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally
184. dinate angle for 3rd hole center 3 Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Enter center of bolt hole circle X and Y in line 1 In the preset table PRESET PR save the calculated datum referenced to the machine based coordinate system REF system Do not set a datum in the touch probe axis No function No function No function No function Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column Activate new preset with Cycle 247 Call part program o i G419 3 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO 16 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 452 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 17 1 Fundamentals 17 1 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe The TNC offers twelve cycles for measuring workpieces automatically O REFERENCE PLANE Measuring a o Page 460 coordinate in a selectable axis Ja e 1 POLAR DATUM PLANE Measuring a 1 PA Page 461 point in a probing direction oh 420 MEASURE ANGLE Measuring an a20 Page 463 angle in the
185. e in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Decrement 0212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Upper advanced stop distance Q258 incremental Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the first plunging depth Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Lower advanced stop distance 0259 incremental Set up clearance for rapid traverse positioning when the TNC moves the tool again to the current plunging depth after retraction from the hole value for the last plunging depth Input range 0 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Z A LO N gt z 9 xX Q LLI A ol lt Y cc LLI lt s G205 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO 82 gt Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental Depth at which the TNC carries out chip breaking No chip breaking if O is entered Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Retraction rate for chip breaking 0256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking The TNC retracts the tool at a feed rate of 3000 mm min In
186. e 423 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 477 il G424 17 8 m e RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO 17 8 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO G424 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 424 finds the center length and width of a rectangular stud If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q parameters Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155
187. e 450 DIN ISO Notes on data management The TNC stores the saved data in the file TNC table DATA450 KD This file can be backed up on an external PC with TNCREMO for example It the file is deleted the stored data are removed too If the data in the file are changed manually the data records can become corrupted so that they cannot be used anymore If the TNC table DATA450 KD file does not exist it Is generated automatically when Cycle 450 is executed Do not change stored data manually Make a backup of the TNC table DATA450 KD file so that you can restore the file if necessary e g if the data medium is damaged 512 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il 19 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 Option Cycle run The touch probe cycle 451 enables you to check and if required optimize the kinematics of your machine Use the 3 D TS touch probe to measure a HEIDENHAIN calibration sphere that you have attached to the machine table KKH 250 ID number 655475 01 or KKH 100 ID number 655475 02 which have particularly high rigidity and are designed especially for machine calibration Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you have any questions in this regard HEIDENHAIN recommends using the calibration soheres The TNC evaluates the static tilting accuracy The software minimizes the spatial error arising from the tilting movements and at the end of the measurement process automatically
188. e all drilling positions in the point pattern 3 11 Programming Examples 6 CYCL DEF 240 CENTERING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q343 0 sSELECT DEPTH DIA Q201 2 DEPTH Q344 10 DIAMETER Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGN Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 7 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 8 L Z 100 RO FMAX 9 TOOL CALL 2 Z 5000 10 L Z 10 RO F5000 11 CYCL DEF 200 DRILLING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q210 0 sDWELL TIME AT TOP Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q211 0 2 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH 12 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 13 L Z 100 RO FMAX 14 TOOL CALL 3 Z 200 15 L Z 50 RO FMAX 16 CYCL DEF 206 TAPPING NEW Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q201 25 DEPTH OF THREAD Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q211 0 DWELL TIME AT DEPTH Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 3 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE 17 CYCL CALL PAT F5000 M13 18 L Z 100 RO FMAX M2 19 END PGM 1 MM 92 Cycle definition CENTERING Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern Retract the tool change the tool Call the drilling tool radius 2 4 Move tool to clearance height enter a value for F Cycle definition drilling Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern Retract the tool Call the tapping tool radius 3 Move tool to clearance height Cycle definition for tapping Call the cycle in connection with the hole pattern
189. e and circumferential surface You can insert a radius in the contour edge You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is less than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the starting point is within the area to be machined the TNC positions the tool in the X coordinate and then in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with 0463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 he TNC machines the area between the starting position and the end point in longitudinal direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point 290 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run If the starting point lies in the area to be machined the TNC positions the tool beforehand to set
190. e cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next touch point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below 5 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q166 Actual value of measured ridge width Q157 Actual value of the centerline Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter a high estimate for the ridge width 3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER Cycle 409 DIN ISO Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 407 il G409 DATUM RIDGE CENTER Cycle 409 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 409 land 408 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the ridge in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 a
191. e defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute m x D 3 p D Z O sa e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 15 TURN CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 Application This cycle enables you to face turn workpieces with any turning contours The contour description is in a subprogram You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the contour the cycle runs outside machining If the starting point of the contour is less than the end point of the contour the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour Starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position a
192. e following coordinate transformation cycles 7 DATUM SHIFT O m Page 245 For shifting contours directly within the m program or from datum tables 247 DATUM SETTING 24 Page 251 Datum setting during program run ee 8 MIRROR IMAGE ae Page 252 Mirroring contours C 10 ROTATION 10 Page 254 For rotating contours in the working plane 11 SCALING 11 Page 256 For increasing or reducing the size of a contours 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING FACTOR 28 cc Page 258 For increasing or reducing the size of P contours with scaling factors for each axis 19 WORKING PLANE TEEN Page 260 Machining in tilted coordinate system on s machines with swivel heads and or rotary tables Effect of coordinate transformations Beginning of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined it is not called separately It remains in effect until it is changed or canceled To cancel coordinate transformations Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 0 Execute a miscellaneous function M2 M30 or an END PGM block depending on machine parameter clearMode Select a new program 244 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il 11 2 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO G54 Effect A DATUM SHIFT allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece When the DATUM SHIFT cycle is defined all coordinate data is based on the new datum The TNC d
193. e hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at the reaming feed rate Input range O to 99999 999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 m x D 3 O T e zA A Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G202 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool bores to the programmed depth at the feed rate for plunging 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time with active spindle rotation for cutting free 4 The TNC then orients the spindle to the position that is defined in parameter Q336 5 If retraction is selected the tool retracts in the programmed direction by 0 2 mm fixed value 6 The TNC moves the tool at the retraction feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX If Q214 0 the tool point remains on the wall of the hole HEIDENHAIN TNC 640
194. e in the Manual and Eme gt og anming ona El Handwheel modes the TNC provides numerous cycles for a wide ee variety of applications in automatic mode ETT Calibrating a touch trigger probe E L aroo no rank Compensating workpiece misalignment ee Setting datums EE Automatic workpiece inspection ee entre ie a aa a Automatic tool measurement tise ser TO Zeo s You can program the touch probe cycles in the Programming and Daganzo 181 PONT 20 MeTs Editing operating mode via the TOUCH PROBE key Like the most e a recent fixed cycles touch probe cycles with numbers greater than 400 Geet lt 2 MEASURING METOT use O parameters as transfer parameters Parameters with specific N A functions that are required in several cycles always have the same asossso nen TW TARE number For example Q260 is always assigned the clearance height je Q261 the measuring height etc To simplify programming the TNC shows a graphic during cycle definition The graphic shows the parameter that needs to be entered see figure at right HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 369 ina General Information about Touch Probe Cycles Defining the touch probe cycle in the Programming and Editing mode of operation The soft key row shows all available touch probe Hais functions divided into groups Select the desired probe cycle group for example datum setting Cycles for automatic tool measurement are available only if your
195. e of the starting point is less than the contour Starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to a safe position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call cycle starting point affects the area to be machined The TNC takes the cutting geometry of the tool into account to prevent damage to contour elements If complete machining with the active tool is not possible a warning is output by the TNC Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 318 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point for the p
196. e slot wall The finishing allowance reduces the slot width by twice the entered value Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance Q6 incremental Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Wy Y m x D 3 p D O e e TA A Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Cylinder radius Q16 Radius of the cylinder on which the contour is to be machined Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dimension type deg 0 MM INCH 1 Q17 The coordinates for the rotary axis of the subprogram are given either in degrees 0 or in mm inches 1 gt Slot width O20 Width of the slot to be machined Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Tolerance Q21 If you use a tool smaller than the programmed slot width Q20 process related distortion occurs on the slot wall wherever the slot follows the path of an arc or oblique line If you define the tolerance O21 the TNC adds a subsequent milling operation to ensure that the slot dimensions are as close as possible to those of a slot that has been milled with a tool exactly as wide as the slo
197. e surface 2 The tool taps to the total hole depth in one movement 3 Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the end of the dwell time If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 4 At the set up clearance the direction of spindle rotation reverses once again Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed A floating tap holder is required for tapping It must compensate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process When a cycle is being run the spindle speed override knob is disabled The teed rate override knob is active only within a limited range which is defined by the machine tool builder refer to your machine manual For tapping right hand threads activate the spindle with M3 for left hand threads use M4 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at
198. e tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset helical movements or in one continuous helical movement After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 120 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 Digs G267 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 121 il G267 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 piso Cycle parameters 267 122 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Thread pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 Thread depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Threads per step Q355 Number of thread revolutions by which the
199. earance height between measuring points Axis for compensation motion 0312 Assignment of the rotary axis in which the TNC is to compensate the measured misalignment 4 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis A 5 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis B 6 Compensate misalignment with rotary axis C gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment Number in table Q305 Enter the number in the preset table datum table in which the TNC is to set the rotary axis to zero Only effective if 0337 is set to 1 Input range O to 2999 gt Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify if the determined basic rotation is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 0 Write the measured basic rotation as a datum shift in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write the measured basic rotation into the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system gt Reference angle 0 ref axis O380 Angle with which the TNC is to align the probed straight line Only effective if the rotary axis C is selected 0312 6 Input range 360 000 to 360 000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 2 D lt O 22 O o 39 Ge G403
200. easuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool number for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor for tool breakage see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range O to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m X D 3 O za e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 17 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO G431 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 431 finds the angle of a plane by measuring three points It saves the measured values in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the programmed starting point 1 and measures the first touch point of the plane The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite to the direction of probing The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves in the working plane to starting point 2 and measures the actual value of the second touch po
201. ece measure hole center and diameter of hole Workpiece measure circle from outside diameter of circular stud Page 460 Page 461 Page 505 Page 533 Page 534 Page 536 Page 538 Page 380 Page 383 Page 386 Page 389 Page 392 Page 393 Page 403 Page 407 Page 410 Page 414 Page 418 Page 422 Page 426 Page 431 Page 435 Page 439 Page 441 Page 445 Page 463 Page 466 Page 470 423 424 425 426 Workpiece measure outside width ridge 427 Workpiece measure in any selectable axis 430 431 450 KinematicsOpt Save kinematics option 451 480 481 Measure Inspect the tool length 482 Measure Inspect the tool radius 483 Workpiece measure rectangle from inside Workpiece measure inside width slot Workpiece measure plane Calibrate TT HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Page 474 Page 478 Workpiece measure rectangle from outside Page 482 Page 485 Page 488 Page 491 Workpiece measure bolt hole circle Page 491 Page 510 KinematicsOpt Measure kinematics option Page 513 Page 533 Page 534 Page 536 Page 538 Measure Inspect the tool length and the tool radius j il Overview M IM AQ 546 Symbole 3 D touch probes 38 368 A Angle of a plane measuring 495 Angle measuring In a plane 495 Automatic tool measurement 531 Axis specitfic scaling 258 B Back boring 75 Basic rotation Measuring during program run 378 Setting directly
202. ection button of the active spindle axis 102 At wl AAN Q Vya CA oT MERN Example NC blocks Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 5 Fundamentals of Thread Milling Prerequisites Your machine tool should feature internal spindle cooling cooling lubricant at least 30 bars compressed air supply at least 6 bars Thread milling usually leads to distortions of the thread profile To correct this effect you need tool specitic compensation values which are given in the tool catalog or are available from the tool manufacturer You program the compensation with the delta value for the tool radius DR in the TOOL CALL The Cycles 262 263 264 and 267 can only be used with rightward rotating tools For Cycle 265 you can use rightward and leftward rotating tools The working direction is determined by the following input parameters Algebraic sign Q239 right hand thread left hand thread and milling method Q351 1 climb 1 up cut The table below illustrates the interrelation between the individual input parameters for rightward rotating tools 4 5 Fundamentals of i Milling Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z _External thread Pitch ____ Climb Up cut_Work direction __ Right handed 1 RL Z Left handed 1 RR Z Right handed 1 RR Z Left handed 1 RL Z thread mill
203. ed angular misalignment Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il SET_UP TCHPROBE TP X Q320 15 7 Compensat HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Center of the 1st hole X coordinate Center of the 1st hole Y coordinate Center of the 2nd hole X coordinate Center of the 2nd hole Y coordinate Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision Angle of the reference line Compensate misalignment by rotating the rotary table Set the display to zero after the alignment Call part program n xX q oe 26 50 o gt a ga LO cs a2 Q T gt TASI D E K Q ov O ea d a _ ws k i GOVD OSI NIC S0 31949 SIX 9 34 Huizezoy Ag zu wuijesiyN BDBIG YONA 1 eSU9GCWIOY GL Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 398 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting 16 1 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used 16 1 Fundamentals The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool i builder for the use of a 3 D touch probe The TNC offers
204. ed dimension cannot be machined with one revolution the TNC performs a stepover with the current factor and machines another revolution The TNC takes the dimensions of the workpiece blank the finished dimension and the permitted stepover into account This process is repeated until the defined finished dimension has been reached The tool then tangentially departs the contour on a semicircle and returns to the starting point for the stud machining The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth and machines the stud at this depth This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth Is reached 148 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle zanso G256 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 149 il G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle oseMN Iso Cycle parameters 150 lst side length 0218 Stud length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece blank side length 1 0424 Length of the stud blank parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Enter Workpiece blank side length 1 greater than lst side length The TNC performs multiple stepovers if the difference between blank dimension 1 and finished dimension 1 is greater than the permitted stepover tool radius multiplied by path overlap Q370 The TNC always calculates a constant stepover Input range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length Q
205. ed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 3 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in an axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the slot form is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 ane CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 C il 13 21 RECESSING CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 Finishing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called 1 2 oOo kf W The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed rate The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Please note while programming 348 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters se Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension Q484
206. eed depth reverses the direction of spindle rotation and retracts by a specific distance or completely for chip breaking depending on the definition If you have defined a factor for increasing the spindle speed the TNC retracts from the hole at the corresponding speed 3 It then reverses the direction of spindle rotation again and advances to the next infeed depth 4 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 3 until the programmed thread depth is reached 5 The tool is then retracted to the set up clearance If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 6 The TNC brings the spindle to a stop at the set up clearance 100 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Please note while programming 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 bijjjso G209 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G209 4 4 TAPPING WITH CHIP BREAKING Cycle 209 Diso Cycle parameters zes pT gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance Z2 between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Pitch 0239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece
207. eference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system Is the machine coordinate system REF system Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the
208. egy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 Vertical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as 0 or 90 The TNC will otherwise display an error message E 1 2 Reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message gt Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 14 G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle a ISO G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle ee 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle 256 DIN ISO G256 Cycle run Use Cycle 256 to machine a rectangular stud If a dimension of the workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover then the TNC performs multiple stepovers until the finished dimension has been machined 1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position stud center in the positive X direction to the starting position for stud machining The starting position is 2 mm to the right of the unmachined stud If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there it advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves tangentially on a semicircle to the stud contour and machines one revolution If the finish
209. eight in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the line intersection If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the intersection of the connecting lines Input range O to 2999 G418 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the calculated intersection of the connecting lines Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated intersection of the connecting lines Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in t
210. em and orients the tool correspondingly The cycle is effective from the time of definition until the next tool call The tool must be clamped and measured in the correct position You can only use Cycle 800 when a turning tool is selected Check the orientation of the tool before machining The Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM is E machine dependent Refer to your machine manual Cycle parameters PRECESSION ANGLE 0497 Angle to which the TNC aligns the tool Input range O to 359 9999 REVERSE TOOL 0498 mirror tool for inside outside machining Input range O and 1 284 Cycles Turning il 13 3 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 801 Application The Cycle 801 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM is O machine dependent Refer to your machine manual With Cycle 801 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM you can reset the settings you have made with Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Effect Cycle 801 resets all settings you have programmed with Cycle 800 They are Precession angle 0497 Reverse tool 0498 not orient the tool to the starting position If a tool was oriented with Cycle 800 it remains in this position also after resetting Cycle 801 merely resets the settings of Cycle 800 It does Cycle parameters Cycle 801 does not have a cycle parameter Finish the cycle input with the END key HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 OTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 801 D i Y LLI cc aie
211. en two path elements whether compensated or not The tool has constant contact with the workpiece surface and therefore reduces wear on the machine tool The tolerance defined in the cycle also affects the traverse paths on circular arcs If necessary the TNC automatically reduces the programmed feed rate so that the program can be machined at the fastest possible speed without short pauses for computing time Even if the TNC does not move with reduced speed it will always comply with the tolerance that you have defined The larger you define the tolerance the faster the TNC can move the axes Smoothing the contour results in a certain amount of deviation from the contour The size of this contour error tolerance value is set in a machine parameter by the machine manufacturer With CYCLE 32 you can change the pre set tolerance value and select different filter settings provided that your machine tool builder has implemented these features HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G62 TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO o il G62 ee Cycle 32 DIN ISO Influences of the geometry definition in the CAM system The most important factor of influence in offline NC program creation is the chord error S defined in the CAM system The maximum point spacing of NC programs generated in a postprocessor PP is defined through the chord error If the chord error is less than or equal to the tolerance value T defined in Cycle 32 then the TNC can smooth
212. ent 0212 incremental Value by which the TNC decreases the plunging depth Q202 after each infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Z A a N amp O gt J g Z as A l lt Y Ce Lu gt _ ap gt No of breaks before retracting 0213 Number of chip breaks after which the TNC is to withdraw the tool from the hole for chip removal For chip breaking the TNC retracts the tool each time by the value In Q256 Input range 0 to 99999 G203 m x D 3 p D O za e zA A gt Minimum plunging depth Q205 incremental If you have entered a decrement the TNC limits the plunging depth to the value entered with Q205 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 gt Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the TNC retracts the tool at the feed rate in Q206 Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO gt Retraction rate for chip breaking Q256 incremental Value by which the TNC retracts the tool during chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO 74 Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO G204 Cycle run This cycle allows holes to be bored from the underside of
213. ent is a radius 0478 Size of starting element Q502 Size of the starting element chamfer section v Radius of contour edge Q500 Radius of the inside contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of 0483 the cutting insert is generated Angle of circumferential surface 0496 Angle between the circumferential surface and the rotary axis 13 12 ia SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 Type of end element Q503 Define the type of the element at the contour end face 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of end element Q504 Size of the end element chamfer section Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed in axial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 315 il 13 12 ru SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 316 gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute gt Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute m x D 3 p D Z O T e o A
214. entering diameter or centering depth 3 If defined the tool remains at the centering depth 4 Finally the tool moves to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at rapid traverse FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter 0344 diameter or Q201 depth determines the working direction If you program the diameter or depth 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive diameter or depth Is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 G240 G240 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 62 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Select depth diameter 0 1 0343 Select whether centering is based on the entered diameter or depth If the TNC is to center based on the entered diameter the point angle of the tool must be defined in the T ANGLE
215. erwise display an error message E 1 2 Reciprocating plunge In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as not equal to 0 The TNC will otherwise display an error message gt Feed rate for finishing 0385 Traversing speed of the tool during side and floor finishing in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO G254 Cycle run Use Cycle 254 to completely machine a circular slot Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool moves in a reciprocating motion in the slot center at the plunging angle defined in the tool table to the first infeed depth Specify the plunging strategy with parameter Q366 2 The TNC roughs out the slot from the inside out taking the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 This process is repeated until the slot depth is reached Finishing 4 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the slot walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The slot side is approached tangentially 5 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the slot from the inside o
216. es Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il 10 1 Fundamentals 10 1 Fundamentals Overview The TNC offers three cycles for machining surfaces with the following characteristics Flat rectangular surfaces Flat oblique angled surfaces Surfaces that are inclined in any way Twisted surfaces 230 MULTIPASS MILLING For flat rectangular surfaces 231 RULED SURFACE For oblique inclined or twisted surfaces 232 FACE MILLING For level rectangular surfaces with indicated oversizes and multiple infeeds 228 238 Page 229 Page 231 Page 235 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 2 MULTIPASS MILLING Cycle 230 DIN ISO G230 Cycle run 1 From the current position in the working plane the TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting point 1 the TNC moves the tool by its radius to the left and upward The tool then moves at FMAX in the tool axis to the set up clearance From there It approaches the programmed starting position in the tool axis at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves at the programmed feed rate for milling to the end point 2 The TNC calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the stepover feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width and the number of cuts The tool then returns in the negative direction of the fi
217. et up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between machining operations Example NC blocks 6 3 CARTESIAN PATTERN Cycle 22 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 16 Examples 0 A J Q Q 3 3 Q rTi gt lt Q 3 so Q ming 3 pe A Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition drilling 66 Fixed Cycles Pattern Definitions il Define cycle for polar pattern 1 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 0203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Examples D 6 4 Progr Define cycle for polar pattern 2 CYCL 200 is called automatically Q200 Q203 and Q204 are effective as defined in Cycle 220 Retract in the tool axis end program HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 167 il 6 4 proin ming Examples 168 Fixed Cycles Pattern Definitions il Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket 7 1 SL Cycles 7 1 SL Cycles Fundamentals SL cycles enable you to form complex contours by combining up to 12 subcontours pockets or islands You define the individual subcontours in subprograms The TNC calculates the total contour trom the sub
218. fety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and moves the rotary axis which was defined in the cycle by the measured value Optionally you can have the display set to O after alignment Please note while programming Danger of collision The TNC does not check whether touch points and compensation axis match This can result in compensation movements offset by 180 Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC stores the measured angle in parameter Q150 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G403 ia Rotary Axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO ion V 15 5 BASIC ie Compensat j il G403 ia Rotary Axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO 15 5 BASIC ROTATION Compensation v Cycle parameters 403 Cos 390 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point lst axis Q265 absolute Coo
219. ffsetToolAxis The TNC probes the tool radially while it is rotating If you have programmed a subsequent measurement of individual teeth the control measures the radius of each tooth with the aid of oriented spindle stops Please note while programming following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be measured with stationary spindle To do so define in the tool table the number of teeth CUT as O and adjust machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your machine tool manual 536 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Cycle parameters Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a tool that has already been measured is to be inspected If the tool is being measured for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool radius R in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DR O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured radius with the tool radius R that is stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DR The deviation can also be used for Q parameter Q116 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool radius tolerance for wea
220. fined feed rate 0478 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point 294 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 7 RN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 j i aan LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 Cycle parameters 296 Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the starting point for the plunging path Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordi
221. fore programming note the following Cycle 14 is DEF active which means that it becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the part program You can list up to 12 subprograms Subcontours in Cycle 14 Cycle parameters 14 Label numbers for the contour Enter all label ae Hosa numbers for the individual subprograms that are to be superimposed to define the contour Confirm every label number with the ENT key When you have entered all numbers conclude entry with the END key Entry of up to 12 subprogram numbers 1 to 254 7 2 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Oh 14 DIN ISO 172 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il 73 Overlapping Contours Fundamentals Pockets and islands can be overlapped to form anew contour You can thus enlarge the area of a pocket by another pocket or reduce It by an island Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 173 il Subprograms overlapping pockets subprograms that are called by Cycle 14 CONTOUR The subsequent programming examples are contour GEOMETRY in a main program Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S4 and S They do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as Tull circles Subprogram 1 Pocket A Subprogram 2 Pocket B 74 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area E The surfaces A and B must be pockets E T
222. frames 51 Defining a full circle 52 Defining a pitch circle 53 2 3 Point Tables 54 Application 54 Creating a point table 54 Hiding single points from the machining process 55 Selecting a point table in the program 56 Calling a cycle in connection with point tables 57 12 3 1 Fundamentals 60 Overview 60 3 2 CENTERING Cycle 240 DIN ISO G240 61 Cycle run 61 Please note while programming 61 Cycle parameters 62 3 3 DRILLING Cycle 200 63 Cycle run 63 Please note while programming 63 Cycle parameters 64 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISO G201 65 Cycle run 65 Please note while programming 65 Cycle parameters 66 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 DIN ISO G202 67 Cycle run 67 Please note while programming 68 Cycle parameters 69 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 71 Cycle run 71 Please note while programming 72 Cycle parameters 73 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO G204 75 Cycle run 75 Please note while programming 76 Cycle parameters 77 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO G205 79 Cycle run 79 Please note while programming 80 Cycle parameters 81 3 9 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 83 Cycle run 83 Please note while programming 84 Cycle parameters 85 3 10 SINGLE LIP D
223. fset so that the diameter is not measured in the radius 532 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il 20 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO G480 Cycle run The TT is calibrated with the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 30 or TCH PROBE 480 see also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 529 The calibration process is automatic The TNC also measures the center misalignment of the calibrating tool automatically by rotating the spindle by 180 after the first half of the calibration cycle The calibrating tool must be a precisely cylindrical part for example a cylinder pin The resulting calibration values are stored in the TNC memory and are accounted for during subsequent tool measurement Please note while programming machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your The functioning of the calibration cycle is dependent on machine manual Before calibrating the touch probe you must enter the exact length and radius of the calibrating tool into the tool table TOOL T The position of the TT within the machine working space must be defined by setting the Machine Parameters centerPos gt 0 to 2 If you change the setting of any of the Machine Parameters centerPos gt 0 to 2 you must recalibrate Cycle parameters Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle Example NC blocks in old format E axis at which there is no danger of collision with the
224. g Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if E the plunging depth is equal to the depth E the plunging depth is greater than the depth Dwell time at top 0210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip removal Input range O to 3600 0000 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 64 m x D 3 O T e zA A Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISO G201 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The tool reams to the entered depth at the programmed feed rate F 3 If programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for the entered dwell time 4 The to
225. g feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 qam 0478 g 0483 oa RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 j il XIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 ae q 346 Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate Q505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute m x D 3 p D Z O za e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 21 RECESSING CONTOUR AXIAL Cycle 870 Application This cycle enables you to axially cut in slots of any form face recessing You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to the contour starting point and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse in the X coordinate first cut in position 2 The TNC runs a paraxial infe
226. g point hole center in the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface 3 10 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO 86 Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures
227. ge 360 0000 to 360 0000 Pocket position Q367 Position of the pocket in reference to the position of the tool when the cycle is called 0 Tool position Center of pocket 1 Tool position Lower left corner 2 Tool position Lower right corner 3 Tool position Upper right corner 4 Tool position Upper left corner Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle Gh iii G251 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle See 132 Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor O369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Workpiece surf
228. ght of the ridge 2 RR up cut milling 2 After the TNC has positioned to the first plunging depth the tool moves on a circular arc at the milling feed rate Q12 tangentially to the ridge wall If so programmed it will leave material for the finishing allowance 3 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed ridge wall at the milling feed rate Q12 until the stud is completed 4 The tool then departs the ridge wall on a tangential path and returns to the starting point of machining 5 Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 6 Finally the tool retracts in the tool axis to the clearance height or to the position last programmed before the cycle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G129 Software Option 1 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge a a 29 DIN ISO j il Please note while programming L uondo 3iemyos 6ZLD OSI NIC 62 a049 Bunun e6ply JOVAYNS YJANITAI v8 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 206 Cycle parameters Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between Example NC blocks the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance on the ridge wall The finishing allowance Increases the ridge width by twice the entered value Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance O6 incremental Distance between the tool tip
229. gle of the third hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 QO2 7420280 Q273 0279 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Maximum limit of size Q288 Maximum permissible diameter of bolt hole circle Inout range O to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size Q289 Minimum permissible diameter of bolt hole circle Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G430 k nee BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO j il G430 1712 MEasurE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO 494 Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR430 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the m
230. gn for negative working direction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q11 Drilling feed rate in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Rough out tool number name Q13 or QS13 Number or name of rough out tool Inout range O to 32767 9 if a number is entered maximum 16 characters if a name is entered 180 Example NC blocks Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account In the first plunging depth the tool mills the contour from the inside outward at the milling feed rate Q12 The island contours here C D are cleared out with an approach toward the pocket contour here A B In the next step the TNC moves the tool to the next plunging depth and repeats the roughing procedure until the program depth is reached Finally the TNC retracts the tool to the clearance height HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G122 7 6 ROUGH OUT a 22 DIN ISO j il 7 6 ROUGH OUT Cycle 22 DIN ISO G122 Please note while programming 182 This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling with Cycle 21 You define the plunging behavior of Cycle 22 with parameter Q19 and with the tool table in the ANGLE and LCUTS columns If Q19 0 is defined the TNC always plunges perpendicularly even if
231. gnal in the parameters Q115 to Q119 For the values in these parameters the TNC does not account for the stylus length and radius Please note while programming Danger of collision Pre position the touch probe in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approached Cycle parameters Parameter number for result Enter the number of La CS the Q parameter to which you want to assign the coordinate Input range O to 1999 Probing axis Probing direction Enter the probing axis with the axis selection keys or ASCII keyboard and the algebraic sign for the probing direction Confirm your entry with the ENT key Input range All NC axes Nominal position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 To conclude the input press the ENT key 460 Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 173 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 1 measures any position on the workpiece in any direction 1 The touch probe moves at rapid traverse value from FMAX column to the starting position 1 programmed in the cycle 2 Then the touch probe runs the probing process at the probing feed rate column F During probing the TNC moves simultaneously in two axes depending on the probing angle The probing di
232. he active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system T CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO b lt m N ae HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 443 il G418 16 12 nardiar CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO 444 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
233. he bolt hole center as datum LL 417 DATUM IN TS AXIS 2nd soft key aF Page 439 Pa row Measuring any position in the touch os Le probe axis and defining it as datum e 418 DATUM FROM 4 HOLES 2nd soft Page 441 key row Measuring 4 holes crosswise and defining the intersection of the lines between them as datum 419 DATUM IN ONE AXIS 2nd soft key mi Page 445 row Measuring any position in any axis nL and defining it as datum Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for datum setting You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419 during an active basic rotation The tilting the working plane function is not permitted in combination with Cycles 408 to 419 Datum point and touch probe axis From the touch probe axis that you have defined in the measuring program the TNC determines the working plane for the datum Z xX and Y Y Zand X X Yand Z HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 401 il Saving the calculated datum In all cycles for datum setting you can use the input parameters Q303 and Q305 to define how the TNC is to save the calculated datum Q305 0 Q303 any value The TNC sets the calculated datum in the display The new datum is active immediately At the same time the TNC saves the datum set in the display by the cycle in line O of the preset table Q305 not equal to 0 0303 1 This combination can only occur if you read in programs containing Cycles 410 to 418 created ona INC 4xx read in program
234. he difference between the end point and starting point of the tool axis taking the finishing allowance into account so that uniform plunging depths are used each time Input range O to 99999 9999 Allowance for floor Q309 incremental Distance used for the last infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Max path overlap factor 0370 Maximum stepover factor k The TNC calculates the actual stepover from the second side length Q219 and the tool radius so that a constant stepover is used for machining If you have entered a radius R2 in the tool table e g tooth radius when using a face milling cutter the TNC reduces the stepover accordingly Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for finishing Q385 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling the last infeed Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when approaching the Starting position and when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely to the material Q389 1 the TNC moves the tool at the feed rate for milling Q207 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance Example NC blocks between tool tip and the starting position
235. he first pocket in Cycle 14 must start outside the second pocket ep ep h h O O D D w gt HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 i i 1 MBvertapping Contours Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B E Surface A must be a pocket and B an island E A must start outside of B E B must start inside of A N c h D gt N urface B Area of intersection Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined E A and B must be pockets E A must start inside of B p p h h O O D D w gt 76 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il 7 4 CONTOUR DATA Cycle 20 DIN ISO G120 Please note while programming Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in Cycle 20 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 74 CONTOUR DATA Sai 20 DIN ISO G120 k i G120 7 4 CONTOUR DATA ile 20 DIN ISO Cycle parameters CONTOUR DATA gt Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Path overlap factor Q2 Q2 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 0001 to 1 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999
236. he working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G410 O Y Z m gt LLJ al g a _ Q LLJ as LL O LLJ Y 16 4 DATUM FRON G410 INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO O LL lt m T 412 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the pocket center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is at the center of the pocket Input range 0 to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should
237. ia Rotary Axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO ion V 15 5 BASIC i Compensat is MEET BASIC ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO G404 15 6 SET BASIC ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO G404 Cycle run With Touch Probe Cycle 404 you can set any basic rotation Example NC blocks automatically during program run This cycle is intended primarily for 5 TCH PROBE 404 BASIC ROTATION resetting a previous basic rotation Cycle parameters aga Preset value for rotation angle Angular value at which the basic rotation is to be set Input range 360 000 to 360 000 392 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il IS G405 15 7 Compensating Workpiece Misalignment by Rotating the C Axis Cycle 405 DIN ISO G405 Cycle run With Touch Probe Cycle 405 you can measure the angular offset between the positive Y axis of the active coordinate system and the center of a hole or the angular offset between the nominal position and the actual position of a hole center t by Rotating the C Ax Cycle 405 DIN ISO The TNC compensates the determined angular offset by rotating the C axis The workpiece can be clamped in any position on the rotary table but the Y coordinate of the hole must be positive If you measure the angular misalignment of the hole with touch probe axis Y horizontal position of the hole it may be necessary to execute the cycle more than once because the measuring strategy causes an inaccu
238. ign means the hole will be bored in the positive spindle axis direction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Material thickness Q250 incremental Thickness of the workpiece Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Off center distance Q251 incremental Off center distance for the boring bar value from tool data sheet Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Tool edge height 0252 incremental Distance between the underside of the boring bar and the main cutting tooth value from tool data sheet Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Feed rate for back boring 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during back boring in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time 0255 Dwell time in seconds at the top of the bore hole Input range O to 3600 000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Z m lt N gt 9 lt cc Q aa xX Q lt aa ae G204 m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DIN ISO 78 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input r
239. il 13 16 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 Application This cycle enables you to radially cut in right angled slots You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the tool is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle Is called the cycle runs outside machining If the tool is inside the contour to be machined the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The cycle processes only the area from the cycle starting point to the end point defined in the cycle 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 4 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 3 until the slot width is reached 5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 16 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 f il 13 16 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 Finishing cycle run oo fh W N The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate The TNC returns the tool at rapid
240. ilting head so that the position that results from the extension of the tool by the set up clearance does not change relative to the workpiece Input range O to 99999 9999 Resetting To cancel the tilt angle redefine the WORKING PLANE cycle and enter an angular value of 0 for all axes of rotation You must then program the WORKING PLANE cycle once again and respond to the dialog question with the NO ENT key to disable the function HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G80 Software Option 1 DIN ISO 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 18 i il G80 Software Option 1 Q L Z A 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle Positioning the axes of rotation positions the axes of rotation automatically or whether they must be positioned manually in the program Refer to your machine manual A The machine tool builder determines whether Cycle 19 Manual positioning of rotary axes If the rotary axes are not positioned automatically in Cycle 19 you must position them in a separate L block after the cycle definition If you use axis angles you can define the axis values right in the L block If you use spatial angles then use the Q parameters Q120 A axis value 0121 B axis value and 0122 C axis value which are described by Cycle 19 Example NC blocks For manual positioning always use the rotary axis positions stored in Q parameters Q120 to Q122 Avoid using functions such as M94 modulo rotary axes in order to avoid discrepan
241. in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640
242. in the tool axis If you are milling with machining strategy O389 2 the TNC moves the tool at the set up clearance over the current plunging depth to the starting point of the next pass Input range O to 99999 9999 G232 Clearance to side Q357 incremental Safety clearance to the side of the workpiece when the tool approaches the first plunging depth and distance at which the stepover occurs If the machining strategy O389 0 or O389 2 is used Input range O to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 10 4 FACE H Cycle 232 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 239 il 10 5 Programming Examples 10 5 Programming Examples Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Retract the tool Cycle definition MULTIPASS MILLING N 40 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Pre position near the starting point Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program n 10 5 Programming Examples 7 i 10 5 Programming Examples 242 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il a er c LL ws q q 11 1 Fundamentals Overview Once a contour has been programmed you can position it on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The TNC provides th
243. inate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle between the side at the contour starting point and the perpendicular to the rotary axis Starting element type 0501 Define the type of the element at the contour start circumferential surface 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of starting element O502 Size of the starting element chamfer section Radius of contour edge Q500 Radius of the inside contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of the cutting insert is generated Angle of second side 0496 Angle between the side at the contour end point and the perpendicular to the rotary axis Type of end element 0503 Define the type of the element at the contour end 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of end element 0504 Size of the end element chamfer section Cycles Turning il gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute
244. ing 0254 Traversing speed of the tool during countersinking in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 _ _ co G267 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 Diso 4 10 OUTSIDE THREAD MILLING Cycle 267 DIN ISO G267 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 5 The TNC moves in the reference axis of the working plane from the center of the stud to the starting point for countersinking at front The position of the starting point is determined by the thread radius tool radius and pitch The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking The tool then moves on a semicircle to the starting point Thread milling 6 10 11 The TNC positions the tool to the starting point if there has been no previous countersinking at front Starting point for thread milling starting point for countersinking at front Th
245. ing angle Q325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic Q273 0279 sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G422 g MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO i il G422 B s MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO 472 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Maximum limit of size for stud Q277 Maxi
246. ing the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system SET_UP TCHPROBE TP X 0320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set In the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Basic setting 0 gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423
247. ing to the tool cutting edge Since the TNC however always displays the feed rate relative to the path of the tool tip the displayed value does not match the programmed value The TNC references the programmed feed rate during The machining direction of the thread changes if you execute a thread milling cycle in connection with Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE in only one axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 103 il 4 5 Fundamentals of thread Milling 104 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 Cycle run 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface The tool moves at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane The starting plane is derived from the algebraic sign of the thread pitch the milling method climb or up cut milling and the number of threads per step The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement Before the helical approach a compensating motion of the tool axis is carried out in order to begin at the programmed starting plane for the thread path Depending on the setting of the parameter for the number of threads the tool mills the thread in one helical movement in several offset helical movements or in one continuous helical movement After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting po
248. inishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed rate 8 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Oo oo kh W N Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 i mein CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 o i Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize D ra j oo Set up clearance O460 Reserved currently without function Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter O483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction CESSING CONTOUR RADIAL Cycle 860 ae m q 338 Cycles Turning il Finishing feed rate Q505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Cutting limit 04
249. int in the working plane At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the setup clearance or if programmed to the 2nd setup clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G262 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN j il 4 6 THREAD MILLING Cycle 262 DIN ISO G262 Please note while programming 106 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il Cycle parameters Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Thread pitch Q239 Pitch of the thread The algebraic sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Input range 99 9999 to 99 9999 gt Thread depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and root of thread Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Threads per step Q355 Number of thread revolutions by which the tool is moved 0 one 360 helical line to the thread depth 1 continuous helical path over the entire length of the thread gt 1 several helical paths with approach and departure between them the TNC offsets the tool by 0355 multiplied by the pitch Input range 0 to 99999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when plunging into the workpiece or when retracting from the workpiece Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3
250. int of the plane The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then moves In the working plane to starting point 3 and measures the actual value of the third touch point Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the measured angle values in the following Q parameters Q158 Projection angle of the A axis Q159 Projection angle of the B axis Q170 Spatial angle A Q171 Spatial angle B Q172 Spatial angle C Q173 to Q175 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Measured values in the touch probe axis first to third measurement G431 17 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO S il G431 17 13 MEASURE PLANE Cycle 431 DIN ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis For the TNC to be able to calculate the angular values the three measuring points must not be positioned on one straight line The spatial angles that are needed for tilting the working plane are saved in parameters Q170 Q172 With the first two measuring points you also specify the direction of the reference axis when tilting the working plane The third measuring point determines the direction of the tool axis Define the third measuring point in the direction of the positive Y axis to ensure that the position of the tool axis in a clockwise coordinate system is correct Cycle parameters 431 a 496 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 abs
251. ion if Mode 2 has been selected Wildcards can be used in Modes 1 and 3 Restore and Delete If several possible data blocks are found because of the wildcards the mean values of the data are restored Mode 1 or all data blocks are deleted after confirmation Mode 3 The following wildcards exist A single undefined character A single alphabetic character letter A single undefined number An undefined string of any length Log function After running Cycle 450 the TNC creates a measuring log TCHPR450 TXT containing the following information E Creation date and time of the log E Path of the NC program from which the cycle was run Mode used O Save 1 Restore 2 Saving status 3 Delete E Designator of the current kinematics E Entered data record identifier The other data in the log vary depending on the selected mode Mode 0 Logging of all axis entries and transformation entries of the kinematics chain that the TNC has saved E Mode 1 Logging of all transformation entries before and after restoring the kinematics configuration Mode 2 List of the saved data records E Mode 3 List of the deleted data records HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example Saving the current kinematics Example Restoring data blocks 19 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO Example Displaying all saved data blocks Example Deleting data blocks G450 Option i i G450 Option 19 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycl
252. ip 0320 X is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O Q263 to 99999 9999 Q264 gt Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinate If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the probed surface Input range 0 to 2999 MC HRROBE TIE SE OR gt New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Measured value transfer 0 1 0303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO Example NC blocks lt m q ri T q 440 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO G4
253. irth coupling 516 Kinematic measurement 513 Kinematics save 510 Log function 511 525 Measuring points choice of 512 517 Measuring positions choice of 517 Prerequisites 509 KinematicsOpt 508 M Machine parameters for 3 D touch probes 371 Machining patterns 46 Measurement results in Q parameters 402 457 Measuring angles 463 Mirror image 252 Multiple measurements 372 O Oriented spindle stop 274 P Pattern definition 46 Pecking 79 86 Deepened starting point 82 87 Point pattern Cartesian 164 Polar 161 Point patterns Overview 160 Point tables 54 Positioning logic 373 Preset table 402 Presetting automatically 400 Center of 4 holes 441 Center of bolt hole circle 435 Center of circular pocket or hole 418 Center of circular stud 422 Center of rectangular pocket 410 Center of rectangular stud 414 In any axis 445 In inside corner 431 In the touch probe axis 439 Outside corner 426 Ridge center 407 Slot center 403 Probing feed rate 372 Program call Via cycle 272 R Reaming 65 Recording the results of measurement 455 Rectangular pocket Roughing finishing 129 Rectangular pocket measurement 478 Rectangular stud 148 Rectangular stud measuring 474 Result parameters 402 457 Ridge measuring from outside 485 Rotary coordinate
254. is The traversing angle must be significantly larger than the actual backlash of the rotary axes If input value 0 the TNC does not measure the backlash Inout range 3 0000 to 3 0000 1 3 then move the touch probe by the safety clearance 0320 SET_UP to a position approximately above the center of the calibration sphere before the start of the cycle If you have activated Preset before the calibration 0431 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G451 Option a MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO f il Option C r G451 P MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO Various modes Q406 E Test mode 0406 0 E The TNC measures the rotary axes in the positions defined and calculates the static accuracy of the tilting transformation The TNC records the results of a possible position optimization but does not make any adjustments E Position Optimization mode 0406 1 E The TNC measures the rotary axes in the positions defined and calculates the static accuracy of the tilting transformation E During this the TNC tries to change the position of the rotary axis in the kinematics model in order to achieve higher accuracy The machine data is adjusted automatically 524 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Example Position optimization of the rotary axes with preceding automatic datum setting and measurement of the rotary axis backlash
255. is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts 308 Cycles Turning il gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate O505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 i TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 o i ist TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 13 11 TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 Application This cycle enables you to face turn right angled shoulders You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the tool is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle Is called the cycle runs outside machining If the tool is inside the contour to be machined the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The cycle processes the area from the cycle starting point to the end point defined in the cycle 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The T
256. ise machining will be clockwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two machining operations on a pitch circle If you enter an angle step of O the TNC will calculate the angle step from the starting and stopping angles and the number of pattern repetitions If you enter a value other than 0 the TNC will not take the stopping angle into account The sign for the angle step determines the working direction negative clockwise Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Number of repetitions 0241 Number of machining operations ona pitch circle Inout range 1 to 99999 Fixed Cycles Pattern Definitions il gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Moving to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the tool is to move between machining processes 0 Move to the set up clearance between operations 1 Move to the 2nd set up clearance between machining operations gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 Q365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between machining operations 0 Move between operatio
257. isplays the datum shift in each axis in the additional status display Input of rotary axes is also permitted Resetting Program a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Cycle parameters gt Datum shift Enter the coordinates of the new datum Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece datum Incremental values are always referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Input range Up to six NC axes each from 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G54 11 2 i SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO Example NC blocks 245 i G53 Jatum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO lt k s x L V gt lt O 11 3 DATUM SHIFT with Datum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 Effect Datum tables are used for Frequently recurring machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece Frequent use of the same datum shift Within a program you can either program datum points directly in the cycle definition or call them from a datum table Resetting Call a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from the datum table Execute a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc directly with a cycle definition Status displays In the additional status display the following data from the datum table are shown Name a
258. itch the spindle on or end the dialog by pressing the END key Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL PAT The CYCL CALL PAT function calls the most recently defined fixed cycle at all positions that you defined in a PATTERN DEF pattern definition see Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF on page 46 or in a point table see Point Tables on page 54 44 Using Fixed Cycles il Calling a cycle with CYCL CALL POS The CYCL CALL POS function calls the most recently defined fixed cycle once The starting point of the cycle Is the position that you defined in the CYCL CALL POS block Using positioning logic the TNC moves to the position defined in the CYCL CALL POS block If the tool s current position in the tool axis is greater than the top surface of the workpiece 0203 the TNC moves the tool to the programmed position first in the machining plane and then in the tool axis If the tool s current position in the tool axis is below the top surface of the workpiece Q203 the TNC moves the tool to the programmed position first in the tool axis to the clearance height and then in the working plane to the programmed position CYCL CALL POS block With the coordinate in the tool axis you can easily change the starting position It serves as an additional datum shift The feed rate most recently defined in the CYCL CALL POS block applies only to traverse to the start position programmed in this block Three coordinate axes must always be
259. ive factor is whether the tool is located inside or outside an envelope contour when the cycle is called The envelope contour is the programmed contour enlarged by the set up clearance If the tool is within the envelope contour the cycle positions the tool at the defined feed rate directly to the starting position This can cause contour damage Position the tool at a sufficient distance from the starting point to prevent the possibility of contour damage If the tool is outside the envelope contour positioning to the envelope contour is performed at rapid traverse and at the programmed feed rate within the envelope contour 286 Cycles Turning il 13 5 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 Application This cycle enables you to carry out longitudinal turning of right angled shoulders You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the tool is outside the contour to be machined when the cycle Is called the cycle runs outside machining If the tool is inside the contour to be machined the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The cycle processes the area from the tool position to the end point defined in the cycle 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC cuts the area between the
260. le threads or multi threads with the cycle If you do not enter a thread depth in the cycle the cycle uses a Standardized thread depth The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining The cycle 830 runs the overrun Q466 following the programmed contour Note the spatial conditions Cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called 1 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set up clearance in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion 2 The TNC runs a thread cut parallel to the defined thread contour Here the TNC synchronizes feed rate and speed so that the defined pitch is machined 3 The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set up clearance 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC runs an infeed motion The infeeds are run according to the angle of infeed Q467 6 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 5 until the thread depth is completed 7 The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in 0476 8 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 7 according to the number of traverses Q475 9 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 See THREAD Cycle 830 j il 13 24 CONTOUR PARALLEL THREAD Cycle 830 Please note while programming 360 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Thread position 0471 Define the position of the thread 0 Ex
261. learance above the workpiece surface Countersinking at front 2 f countersinking is before thread milling the tool moves at the feed rate for countersinking to the sinking depth at front If countersinking occurs after thread milling the TNC moves the tool to the countersinking depth at the feed rate for pre positioning 3 The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking 4 The tool then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 5 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread 6 The tool then approaches the thread diameter tangentially in a helical movement 7 The tool moves on a continuous helical downward path until it reaches the thread depth 8 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 9 Atthe end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 116 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il G9ZD ostiNid G9Z 819AD DNITMIA DNITMNYG GVSYHL 1V NAH 6 r Please note while programming a 117 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G265 4 9 HELICAL THREAD DRILLING MILLING Cycle 265 so Cycle parameters 265 118 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input range 0 to
262. les Clamp the calibration sphere as far as possible away from the center of rotation Machines with large traverse Clamp the calibration sphere as closely as possible to the position intended for subsequent machining HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G451 Option a MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO i il G451 Option P MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO Notes on the accuracy The geometrical and positioning errors of the machine influence the measured values and therefore also the optimization of a rotary axis For this reason there will always be a certain amount of error If there were no geometrical and positioning errors any values measured by the cycle at any point on the machine at a certain time would be exactly reproducible The greater the geometrical and positioning errors are the greater is the dispersion of measured results when you perform measurements at different positions The dispersion of results recorded by the TNC in the measuring log is a measure of the machine s static tilting accuracy However the measuring circle radius and the number and position of measuring points have to be included in the evaluation of accuracy One measuring point alone is not enough to calculate dispersion For only one point the result of the calculation is the spatial error of that measuring point If several rotary axes are moved simultaneously their error values are combined In the worst case they are added togethe
263. lly Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane to the starting position circle center with radius compensation RO The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note parameter Q204 2nd set up clearance The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting position At the end of a roughing operation the TNC positions the tool back to the pocket center at rapid traverse The tool is above the current pecking depth by the set up clearance Enter the set up clearance so that the tool cannot jam because of chips The TNC outputs an error message during helical plunging if the internally calculated diameter of the helix is smaller than twice the tool diameter If you are using a center cut tool you can switch off this monitoring function via the suppressPlungeErr machine parameter Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining ope
264. lue Only the position of the rotary axis with respect to the workpiece surface will change Input range O to 179 9999 Example NC blocks Cycles Special Functions il m 13 1 Turning Cycles Software Option 50 13 1 Turning Cycles Software Option 50 Overview Defining turning cycles The soft key row shows the available groups of za cycles Select the menu for cycle group TURNING Select cycle group e g cycles for longitudinal turning Select cycle e g TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL The TNC offers the following cycles for turning operations Special cycles ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 800 RESET ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 801 Cycles for longitudinal turning TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 280 SPECIAL CYCLES Page 283 Page 285 Page 286 Page 287 Page 290 Page 294 Page 298 Page 302 Page 306 Cycles Turning il Cycles for transverse turning Cycles for recessing Cycles for thread turning HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 TURN CONTOUR T
265. lunging path Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle of the plunging side The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the rotary axis Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed in axial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 D r J co D ra on Li 0493 Q483 sagen TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 j il 13 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE Cycle 823 320 Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction Finishing feed rate Q505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute m x D 3 pei D Z O sa e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 14 TURN TRANSVERSE PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 824 Application This cycle enables you to face turn plunge elements undercuts Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end
266. ly PREDEF Retraction height 0408 absolute Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 E Input O Do not move to any retraction height The TNC moves to the next measuring position in the axis to be measured Not allowed for Hirth axes The TNC moves to the first measuring position in the sequence A then B then C E Input gt 0 Retraction height in the untilted workpiece coordinate system to which the TNC positions before a rotary axis positioning in the spindle axis Also the TNC moves the touch probe in the working plane to the datum Probe monitoring is not active in this mode Define the positioning velocity in parameter Q253 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 2 D N D 5 Q o 5 a O a D O x 5 Q or a D x 5 D D 52 G451 Option 19 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 Option P MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 522 Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing speed of the tool during positioning in mm min Input range 0 0001 to 99999 9999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO PREDEF Reference angle Q380 absolute Reference angle basic rotation for measuring the measuring points in the active workpiece coordinate system Defining a reference angle can considerably enlarge the measuring range of an axis Input range 0 to 360 0000 Start angle A axis 0411 absolute Starting angle in the A axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999
267. ly takes an active rotation of the coordinate system into account Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 202 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during boring at mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range O to 3600 0000 Retraction feed rate Q208 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when retracting from the hole If you enter Q208 0 the tool retracts at feed rate for plunging Inout range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Z m N N gt 9 lt cc Q aa LO G202 3 5 BORING Cycle 202 m x D 3 p D 70 gt Disengaging direction 0 1 2 3 4 0214 Determine the direction in which the TNC retracts the tool at the hole bottom after spindle orientation 0 Do not retract tool 1 Retract
268. machine has been prepared for them Select a cycle e g datum setting at pocket center The TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks for all required input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt is highlighted Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Cycles for automatic measurement and Page 378 compensation of workpiece misalignment Cycles for automatic workpiece Page 400 presetting m x D 3 O T e zA A Cycles for automatic workpiece inspection Special cycles EN Page 504 Cycles for automatic tool measurement Page 528 enabled by the machine tool builder Page 454 neral Information about Touch Probe Cycles 370 Using Touch Probe Cycles il 14 2 Before You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles To make It possible to cover the widest possible range of applications machine parameters enable you to determine the behavior common to all touch probe cycles Maximum traverse to touch point DIST in touch probe table If the stylus is not deflected within the path defined in DIST the TNC outputs an error message Set up clearance to touch point SET_UP in touch probe table In SET _UP you define how far from the defined or calcul
269. machining Cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called 1 2 The TNC positions the tool in rapid traverse at set up clearance in front of the thread and runs an infeed motion The TNC runs a paraxial longitudinal cut Here the TNC synchronizes feed rate and speed so that the defined pitch is machined The TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse by the set up clearance The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut The TNC runs an infeed motion The infeeds are run according to the angle of infeed Q467 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 5 until the thread depth is completed The TNC runs the number of air cuts as defined in 0476 The TNC repeats the process 2 to 7 according to the number of traverses 0475 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 i il 13 22 LONGITUDINAL THREAD Cycle 831 Please note while programming 352 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Thread position 0471 Define the position of the thread 0 External thread 1 Internal thread Set up clearance O460 Set up clearance in radial and axial direction In axial direction the set up clearance is used for acceleration approach path to the synchronized feed rate Thread diameter Q460 Define the diameter of the thread For external threads Q
270. machining direction of the contour 0 The contour is machined in the programmed direction 1 The contour is machined Inversely to the programmed direction Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed in axial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction a i CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 327 il 13 15 Arn CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 328 gt Finishing feed rate Q505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute gt Plunging 0487 Permit machining of plunging elements 0 Do not machine plunging elements 1 Machine plunging elements Feed rate for plunging 0488 Feed rate for machining of plunging elements Cutting limit 0479 Activate the cutting limit 0 No cutting limit active 1 Cutting limit 0480 0482 Limit value for diameter 0480 X value for contour limitation diameter value Limit value Z 0482 Z value for contour limitation Example NC blocks
271. made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Datum number in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinates of the stud center If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the stud center Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 0332 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the stud center Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Sav
272. maticsOpt cycles the control must be restarted Otherwise the changes could be lost in certain circumstances HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 509 il G450 Option 19 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO 19 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 Option Cycle run With the touch probe cycle 450 you can save the active machine kinematic configuration or restore a previously saved one The saved data can be displayed and deleted 16 memory spaces in total are available Please note while programming Always save the active kinematics configuration before running a kinematics optimization Advantage You can restore the old data if you are not satisfied with the results or if errors occur during optimization e g power failure With the Restore mode note that the TNC can restore saved data only to a matching kinematic configuration a change in the kinematics always changes the preset as well Set the preset again if necessary 510 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Cycle parameters a50 Mode 0 1 2 3 0410 Specify whether to save or p restore a kinematics configuration 0 Save active kinematics 1 Restore previously saved kinematics configuration 2 Display the saving status 3 Delete a data block Memory designation 0409 O0S409 Number or name of the data block designator The character length must not exceed 16 characters 16 memory spaces In total are available Without funct
273. measure both the length and radius of a tool program the measuring cycle TCH PROBE 33 or TCH PROBE 482 see also Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 on page 529 This cycle is particularly suitable for the first measurement of tools as It saves time when compared with individual measurement of length and radius Via input parameters you can select the desired type of measurement Measuring the tool while it is rotating Measuring the tool while it is rotating and subsequently measuring the individual teeth The TNC measures the tool in a fixed programmed sequence First it measures the tool radius then the tool length The sequence of measurement is the same as for measuring cycles 31 and 32 Please note while programming following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the number of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the Cylindrical tools with diamond surfaces can be measured with stationary spindle To do so define in the tool table the number of teeth CUT as 0 and adjust machine parameter CfgToolMeasurement Refer to your machine tool manual 538 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Cycle parameters 33 E Je 483 E A Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a tool that has already been measured is to
274. measuring log The TNC saves the log file TCHPR426 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message G426 gt Tool for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T a MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 487 il G427 _ MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO 17 11 MEASURE COORDINATE Cycle 427 DIN ISO G427 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 427 finds a coordinate in a selectable axis and saves the value in a system parameter If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction
275. med direction Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction Q478 qaam Q484 Q460 T 6 Q483 Cycles Turning il gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute gt Plunging 0487 Permit machining of plunging elements 0 Do not machine plunging elements 1 Machine plunging elements gt Feed rate for plunging 0488 Feed rate for machining of plunging elements Cutting limit 0479 Activate the cutting limit 0 No cutting limit active 1 Cutting limit 0480 0482 Limit value for diameter 0480 X value for contour limitation diameter value gt Limit value Z 0482 Z value for contour limitation N CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 b v q m x D 3 po D lt O za e o A HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 30 eh TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 13 10 TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 Application This cycle enables yo
276. milling 1 up cut milling Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of slot Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor 0369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Infeed for finishing 0338 incremental Infeed per cut Q338 0 Finishing in one infeed Input range O to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle GS i j il G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle me 142 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Plunging strategy O366 Type of plunging strategy E 0 Vertical plunging In the tool table the plunging angle ANGLE for the active tool must be defined as 0 or 90 The TNC will oth
277. minor axis b lt m N we HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 441 il G418 16 12 _ CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 442 lst center in 1st axis Q268 absolute center of the 1st hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 1st center in 2nd axis Q269 absolute center of the 1st hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd center in 1st axis Q270 absolute center of the 2nd hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd center in 2nd axis Q271 absolute center of the 2nd hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd center in 1st axis 0316 absolute center of the 3rd hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd center in 2nd axis 0317 absolute center of the 3rd hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4th center in 1st axis 0318 absolute center of the 4th hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 4th center in 2nd axis 0319 absolute center of the 4th hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring h
278. mum permissible diameter for the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size for the stud Q278 Minimum permissible diameter for the stud Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR422 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message Tool for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T gt No of measuring points 4 3 0423 Specify whether the TNC should measure the stud with 4
279. n moves at FMAX to the set up clearance above the first plunging depth 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F 5 The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached 6 The tool is retracted from the hole bottom to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming center In the working plane with radius compensation RO Program a positioning block for the starting point hole The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered This means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 3 DRILLING T 200 3 3 DRILLING pete 200 Cycle parameters zeo gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance A between tool tip and workpiece surface Enter a positive value Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plungin
280. n the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 48 m X D 3 p D Z O 2a e a A 17 8 a ii RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Cycle 424 DIN ISO Ge G424 G425 A MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO 179 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO G425 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 425 measures the position and width of a slot or pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in a system parameter 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET
281. nables you to measure tools automatically The compensation values for tool length and radius can be stored in the central tool file TOOL T and are accounted for at the end of the touch probe cycle The following types of tool measurement are provided Tool measurement while the tool is at standstill Tool measurement while the tool is rotating Measurement of individual teeth You can program the cycles for tool measurement in the Programming and Editing mode of operation via the TOUCH PROBE key The following cycles are available Calibrating the TT Cycles 30 and 480 lt 0 Page 533 caL amp Measuring the tool length Cycles 31 and 481 a81 31 Page 534 Measuring the tool radius Cycles 32 and 482 aaa 32 Page 536 H z i z Measuring the tool length and radius Cycles 33 and 483 oe 33 Page 538 J T The measuring cycles can be used only when the central tool file TOOL T is active Before working with the measuring cycles you must first enter all the required data into the central tool file and call the tool to be measured with TOOL CALL 528 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 The features and the operating sequences are absolutely identical There are only two differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 Cycles 481 to 483 are also available in controls for ISO programming under G481 to G483 Instead of a selectable par
282. nate of the contour end point Angle of side 0495 Angle of the plunging side The reference angle is formed by the perpendicular to the rotary axis Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts Q478 4am Cycles Turning il gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D lt O za e a A oe LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 C i 13 8 TURN Pe e PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 13 8 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 Application This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of shoulders with plunge elements undercuts Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end In the cycle you can define an angle for the face and a radius for the contour edge You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining
283. nates of the corner If you enter Q305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum Is on the corner Input range O to 2999 New datum for reference axis 0331 absolute Coordinate in the reference axis at which the TNC should set the corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum for minor axis 03372 absolute Coordinate in the minor axis at which the TNC should set the calculated corner Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system 16 9 DATUM HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 433 il G415 16 9 om INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO 434 Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in
284. nce by which the touch probe is displaced before the second measurement If you enter O the TNC does not offset the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in the working plane in which the measurement Is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal length 0311 Nominal value of the length to be measured Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Maximum dimension Q288 Maximum permissible length Input range O to 99999 9999 Minimum dimension 0289 Minimum permissible length Input range 0 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G425 i MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO i il G425 m X D 3 O T e zA A a MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH Cycle 425 DIN ISO Measuring log Q281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR425 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run wi
285. nd path of the active datum table Active datum number Comment from the DOC column of the active datum number 246 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Please note while programming 11 3 DATUM SHIFT with pgeur Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 247 il Cycle parameters G53 F Datum shift Enter the number of the datum from the Example NC blocks Q parameter the TNC activates the datum number entered in the Q parameter Input range O to 9999 Selecting a datum table in the part program With the SEL TABLE function you select the table from which the TNC takes the datums To select the functions for program call press the ae PGM CALL key Press the DATUM TABLE soft key Select the complete path name of the datum table or the file with the SELECT soft key and confirm your entry with the END key Program a SEL TABLE block before Cycle 7 Datum Shift A datum table selected with SEL TABLE remains active until you select another datum table with SEL TABLE or through PGM MGT Jatum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO F s x L V gt lt m m 248 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Editing the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation save the change with the ENT key Otherwise the change After you have changed a value in a datum table you must might not be included during program run Select the datum table in the Programming and
286. nd the end point in the transverse direction The transverse cut Is run paraxially with the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 a i CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 j il 13 15 TURN CONTOUR TRANSVERSE Cycle 820 Finishing cycle run If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming 326 Cycles Turning il Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Reverse contour 0499 Define the
287. nds using the calibration soheres KKH 250 ID number 655475 01 or KKH 100 ID number 655475 02 which have particularly high rigidity and are designed especially for machine calibration Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you have any questions in this regard The kinematics description of the machine must be complete and correct The transformation values must be entered with an accuracy of approx 1 mm The complete machine geometry must have been measured by the machine tool builder during commissioning The machine tool builder must have defined the machine parameters tor CfgKinematicsOpt in the configuration data maxModification specifies the tolerance limit starting trom which the TNC is to display a message if the changes to the kinematic data exceed this limit value maxDevCalBall defines how much the measured radius of the calibration sohere may deviate from the entered cycle parameter mStrobeRotAxPos defines an M function that is specifically configured by the machine manufacturer and is used to position the rotary axes 19 2 Prerequisites Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used mStrobeRotAxPos you have to position the rotary axes to 0 ACTUAL system before starting one of the KinematicsOpt cycles except for 450 If an M function has been defined in machine parameter If machine parameters were changed through the Kine
288. never you want to run a cycle or several cycles in sequence on an Irregular point pattern If you are using drilling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the hole centers If you are using milling cycles the coordinates of the working plane in the point table represent the starting point coordinates of the respective cycle e g center point coordinates of a circular pocket Coordinates in the spindle axis correspond to the coordinate of the workpiece surface Creating a point table Select the Programming and Editing mode of operation Call the file manager Press the PGM MGT key iene Enter the name and file type of the point table and ENT confirm your entry with the ENT key on Select the unit of measure Press the MM or INCH soft key The TNC switches to the program blocks window and displays an empty point table With the soft key INSERT LINE insert new lines and aaia enter the coordinates of the desired machining position Repeat the process until all desired coordinates have been entered The name of the point table must begin with a letter With the soft keys X OFF ON Y OFF ON Z OFF ON second soft key row you can specify which coordinates you want to enter in the point table 54 Using Fixed Cycles il Hiding single points from the machining process In the FADE column of the point table you can specify if the defined point is to be hidden during the
289. ng Cycles 286 13 5 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL Cycle 811 287 Application 287 Roughing cycle run 287 Finishing cycle run 288 Please note while programming 288 Cycle parameters 289 13 6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 290 Application 290 Roughing cycle run 290 Finishing cycle run 291 Please note while programming 291 Cycle parameters 292 13 7 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE Cycle 813 294 Application 294 Roughing cycle run 294 Finishing cycle run 295 Please note while programming 295 Cycle parameters 296 13 8 TURN LONGITUDINAL PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 298 Application 298 Roughing cycle run 298 Finishing cycle run 299 Please note while programming 299 Cycle parameters 300 13 9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 302 Application 302 Roughing cycle run 302 Finishing cycle run 303 Please note while programming 303 Cycle parameters 304 13 10 TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 306 Application 306 Roughing cycle run 306 Finishing cycle run 307 Please note while programming 307 Cycle parameters 308 13 11 TURN SHOULDER FACE Cycle 821 310 Application 310 Roughing cycle run 310 Finishing cycle run 311 Please note while programming 311 Cycle parameters 312 13 12 T
290. ng of relatively complex contours consisting of several overlapping subcontours cylinder surface interpolation Cycles for multipass milling of flat or twisted surfaces Coordinate transformation cycles which enable datum shift rotation mirror image enlarging and reducing for various contours Special cycles such as dwell time program call oriented spindle stop and tolerance Cycles for turning operations o If required switch to machine specific fixed cycles These fixed cycles can be integrated by your machine tool builder HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 1 2 Available Cycle arogi Page 60 a Page 94 rockers Page 128 Ee Page 160 su tr Page 171 pa Page 228 es Page 244 SS Page 270 Page 280 1 2 Available Cycle croft Overview of touch probe cycles The soft key row shows the available groups of PROBE cycles Cycles for automatic measurement and compensation of workpiece misalignment Page 378 Cycles for automatic workpiece presetting Page 400 4 Cycles for automatic workpiece inspection Page 454 mai Special cycles ear Page 504 Cycles for automatic kinematics measurement KINEMATICS Page 508 A Cycles for automatic tool measurement enabled by the machine tool builder a Page 528 A If required switch to machine specific touch probe cycles These touch probe cycles can be integrated by your machine tool builder 40 Fundamentals Overviews il th Fixed Pies ing wi 2
291. nging side The reference angle is formed by the perpendicular to the 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius rotary axis Starting element type 0501 Define the type of the _ _Q484 Q478 element at the contour start circumferential surface WE qam Size of starting element Q502 Size of the starting element chamfer section Radius of contour edge 0500 Radius of the inside Q483 contour edge If no radius is specified the radius of the cutting insert is generated Angle of face 0496 Angle between the face and the rotary axis Type of end element O503 Define the type of the element at the contour end face 0 No additional element 1 Element is a chamfer 2 Element is a radius Size of end element Q504 Size of the end element chamfer section 300 Cycles Turning il gt Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour gt Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeter
292. nishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter Q491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter Q491 is less than the end diameter Q493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the starting point is within the area to be machined the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate and then in the X coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and the end point in the plane direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate by one infeed value 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 13 12 Ee SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 o il 13 12 7 SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point
293. nput range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height Q301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points gt Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR420 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Q260 Example NC blocks G420 17 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO i i G421 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO 17 5 MEASURE HOLE Cycle 421 DIN ISO G421 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 421 measures the center and diameter of a hole or circular pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first
294. nput range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis 0263 Q265 C Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Traverse direction 1 Q267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis 0261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur I
295. ns on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle G220 Q200 Q204 Q L Z m Example NC blocks 6 2 POLAR PATTERN Cycle 22 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 163 il 6 3 CARTESIAN PATTERN A Cycle 221 DIN ISO G221 g o Cycle run V 1 The TNC automatically moves the tool from its current position to N the point of the first machining operation Z Sequence m 2 Move to the 2nd set up clearance spindle axis Approach the starting point in the spindle axis Move to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface spindle axis 2 From this position the TNC executes the last defined fixed cycle 3 The tool then approaches the point of the next machining operation in the positive reference axis direction at the set up clearance or the 2nd set up clearance 4 This process 1 to 3 is repeated until all machining operations on the first line have been executed The tool is located above the last point on the Tirst line 5 The tool subsequently moves to the last point on the second line where It carries out the machining operation From this position the tool approaches the point of the next machining operation in the negative reference axis direction 7 This process 6 is repeated until all machining operations in the second line have been executed 8 The tool then moves to the starting point of the next line 9 All subsequent lines are processed in a reciprocating movement Please
296. nsates the calculated value As an alternative you can also compensate the determined misalignment by rotating the rotary table 1 Following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 the TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from column FMAX to the starting point 1 of the first stud 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height 1 and probes four points to find the center of the first stud The touch probe moves on a circular arc between the touch points each of which is offset by 90 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then positions the probe to starting point 5 of the second stud 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height 2 and probes four points to find the center of the second stud 5 Then the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming ION over Two Studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle If you want to compensate the misalignment by rotating the rotary table the TNC will automatically use the following rotary axes C for tool axis Z B for tool axis Y A for tool axis X cc Y lt q aa x LO 386 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Cycle
297. ntil the finished diameter has been machined 1 The tool moves from the cycle starting position stud center in the positive X direction to the starting position for stud machining The starting position is 2 mm to the right of the unmachined stud If the tool is at the 2nd set up clearance it moves at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance and from there advances to the first plunging depth at the feed rate for plunging The tool then moves tangentially on a semicircle to the stud contour and machines one revolution If the finished diameter cannot be machined with one revolution the TNC performs a stepover with the current factor and machines another revolution The TNC takes the dimensions of the workpiece blank diameter the finished diameter and the permitted stepover into account This process is repeated until the defined finished diameter has been reached The tool then tangentially departs the contour on a semicircle and returns to the starting point for the stud machining The TNC then plunges the tool to the next plunging depth and machines the stud at this depth This process is repeated until the programmed stud depth Is reached 152 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il Please note while programming 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 25 NSO G257 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 153 il G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle os MEIN ISO Cycle parameters 154 Finished part diameter 0223
298. ntours which you link together through a contour formula contour description programs is limited to 128 contours The number of possible contour elements depends on the type of contour inside or outside contour and the number of contour descriptions You can program up to 16384 elements The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all Complex Contour Formula The SL cycles with contour formula presuppose a structured program layout and enable you to save frequently used contours in individual programs Using the contour formula you can connect the subcontours to a complete contour and define whether it applies to a pocket or island In its present form the SL cycles with contour formula function requires input from several areas in the TNC s user interface This function is to serve as a basis for further development mMm a6 Q 5D Q J o O 3 oT D3 oA O Z s O og eS O a cS 25 5 gt Pp r 9 1 SL Cycles 214 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il Properties of the subcontours Example Program structure Calculation of the l subcontours with contour formula By default the TNC assumes that the contour is a pocket Do not program a radius compensation The TNC ignores feed rates F and miscellaneous functions M E Coordinate transformations are allowed If they are programmed within the subcon
299. number of teeth and the cutting direction Before measuring a tool for the first time enter the You can run an individual tooth measurement of tools with up to 20 teeth Cycle parameters a Measure tool 0 Check tool 1 Select whether the Z tool is to be measured for the first time or whether a aa tool that has already been measured is to be E inspected If the tool is being measured for the first time the TNC overwrites the tool length L in the central tool file TOOL T by the delta value DL O If you wish to inspect a tool the TNC compares the measured length with the tool length L that is stored in TOOL T It then calculates the positive or negative deviation from the stored value and enters it into TOOL T as the delta value DL The deviation can also be used for Q parameter Q115 If the delta value is greater than the permissible tool length tolerance for wear or break detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL 1 gt Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn LTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken LBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to
300. nute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z O484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction gt Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute 0493 m x D 3 poe O T e o A 342 Cycles Turning il 13 20 AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 Application This cycle enables you to axially cut in slots face recessing Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot You can insert radii in the contour edges You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning Is run paraxially with roughing Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than Q492 CONTOUR START IN Z the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to Q492 and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in radial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse t
301. o 360 000 absolute or incremental HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G73 MeO TATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO j i G72 A scaune Cycle 11 DIN ISO 11 7 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO G72 Effect The TNC can increase or reduce the size of contours within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances SCALING becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display The scaling factor has an effect on All three coordinate axes at the same time Dimensions in cycles Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour Enlargement SCL greater than 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction SCL less than 1 down to 0 000 001 Resetting Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 256 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters G72 gt Scaling factor Enter the scaling factor SCL The Example NC blocks TNC multiplies the coordinates and radii by the SCL factor as described under Effect above Input range 0 000000 to 99 999999 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 257 il m P SCALING Cycle 26 11 8 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 Effect With Cycle 26 you can account for shrinkage and oversize factors f
302. o the beginning of cut 4 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 3 until the slot width is reached 5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 ae RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 i il AXIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 872 q Finishing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than 0492 CONTOUR START IN Z the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to Q492 and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side 2 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse 4 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side 5 The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 6 The TNC finishes one half of the slot at the defined feed rate 17 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the first side 8 The TNC finishes the other half of the slot at the defined feed rate 9 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Please note while programming Program a positioning block to the starting position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point 344 Cycles
303. of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Starting point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface used to calculate the infeeds Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 End point in 3rd axis Q386 absolute Coordinate in the spindle axis to which the surface is to be face milled Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst side length Q218 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the reference axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first milling path in reference to the starting point in the 1st axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd side length 0219 incremental value Length of the surface to be machined in the minor axis of the working plane Use the algebraic sign to specify the direction of the first stepover in reference to the starting point in the 2nd axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 0227 Q386 237 G232 10 4 FACE H Cycle 232 DIN ISO G232 10 4 FACE me Cycle 232 DIN ISO 238 Maximum plunging depth Q202 incremental value Maximum amount that the tool is advanced each time The TNC calculates the actual plunging depth from t
304. ogrammed the plunging depth is decreased after each infeed by the decrement The TNC repeats this process 2 to 4 until the programmed total hole depth is reached The tool remains at the hole bottom if programmed for the entered dwell time to cut free and then retracts to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 G205 3 8 UNIVERSAL PECKING Cycle 205 DIN ISO G205 Please note while programming 80 Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 205 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth Is greater than the depth Workpiece surface coordinate 0203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinat
305. ogramming Examples 498 18 1 Fundamentals 504 Overview 504 18 2 MEASURING Cycle 3 505 Cycle run 505 Please note while programming 505 Cycle parameters 506 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 33 il 19 1 Kinematics Measurement with TS Touch Probes KinematicsOpt Option 508 Fundamentals 508 Overview 508 19 2 Prerequisites 509 Please note while programming 509 19 3 SAVE KINEMATICS Cycle 450 DIN ISO G450 Option 510 Cycle run 510 Please note while programming 510 Cycle parameters 511 Log function 511 Notes on data management B12 19 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO G451 Option 513 Cycle run 513 Positioning direction 515 Machines with Hirth coupled axes 516 Choice of number of measuring points 517 Choice of the calibration sphere position on the machine table 517 Notes on the accuracy 518 Backlash 519 Please note while programming 520 Cycle parameters 521 Various modes 0406 524 Log function 525 34 20 1 Fundamentals 528 Overview 528 Differences between Cycles 31 to 33 and Cycles 481 to 483 529 Setting the machine parameters 530 Entries in the tool table TOOL T 531 20 2 Calibrating the TT Cycle 30 or 480 DIN ISO G480 539 Cycle run 533 Please note while programming 533 Cycle parameters 533 20 3
306. ol axis Note parameter Q204 2nd set up clearance At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting point slot center in the working plane Exception if you define a slot position not equal to 0 then the TNC only positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance In these cases always program absolute traverse movements after the cycle call The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed If the slot width is greater than twice the tool diameter the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly trom the inside out You can therefore mill any slots with small tools too Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface If you call the cycle with machining operation 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool to the first plunging depth at rapid traverse HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle 253 DIN ISO j il G253 5 4 SLOT MILLING Cycle See Cycle parameters 253 140 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation
307. ol then retracts to the set up clearance at the feed rate F and from there if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the starting point hole center In the working plane with radius compensation RO The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered the TNC should output an error message on or not off lt A N O gt S lt lt LLI as T ap Keep in mind that the TNC reverses the calculation for pre positioning when a positive depth is entered his means that the tool moves at rapid traverse in the tool axis to set up clearance below the workpiece surface HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 65 il N g 3 4 REAMING Cycle 201 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 66 gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during reaming in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU gt Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at th
308. olute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 3rd axis Q294 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 1st axis Q265 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 3rd axis Q295 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 1st axis Q296 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 3rd meas point 2nd axis 0297 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Q263 0296 0269 Sele UG HO ser 0320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 3rd meas point 3rd axis Q298 absolute Coordinate of the third touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
309. on Make sure however that the basic rotation angle does not change when you use Cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables after the measuring cycle You can also run the Touch Probe Cycles 408 to 419 during Touch probe cycles with a number greater than 400 position the touch probe according to a positioning logic If the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is less than the coordinate of the clearance height defined in the cycle the TNC retracts the touch probe in the probe axis to the clearance height and then positions it in the working plane to the first starting position If the current coordinate of the south pole of the stylus is greater than the coordinate of the clearance height the TNC first positions the probe in the working plane to the first starting position and then moves It immediately to the measuring height in the touch probe axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 i i You Start Working with Touch Probe Cycles o il 14 3 Touch Probe Table 14 3 Touch Probe Table General information Various data is stored in the touch probe table that defines the probe behavior during the probing process If you run several touch probes on your machine tool you can save separate data for each touch probe Editing touch probe tables To edit the touch probe table proceed as follows Select the Manual Operation mode Select the touch probe functions by pressing the H TOUCH PROBE soft key The TNC displays additi
310. on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 17 12 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO G430 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 430 finds the center and diameter of a bolt hole circle by probing three holes If you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from column FMAX following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the center of the first hole 1 2 Then the probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the first hole center 3 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the third hole 3 6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the third hole center 7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the de
311. onal soft keys see table above TCH PROBE Select the touch probe table Press the TCH PROBE RE TABLE soft key EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON DFF oN Using the arrow keys select the desired setting Perform desired changes Exit the touch probe table Press the END soft key 374 Table editing GS Manual operation Table editin NC table tchprobe tp NO TYPE AL_OF1 1 5 Selection of the touch probe BEGIN 06 50 BJTest run aE FMAX DIST SET_UP PREPOS FMAX_P FMAX_P H g f A G 7 OFF on F100 AW OFF on TN 3 BEGIN EN m ENS to gt DEE TABLE Using Touch Probe Cycles il Touch probe data NO TYPE CAL_OF1 CAL_OF2 CAL_ANG FMAX DIST SET UP F_PREPOS TRACK Number of the touch probe Enter this number in the tool table column TP_NO under the appropriate tool number Selection of the touch probe used Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the reference axis Offset of the touch probe axis to the spindle axis for the minor axis The TNC orients the touch probe to the orientation angle before calibration or probing if orientation is possible Feed rate at which the TNC is to probe the workpiece Feed rate at which the touch probe pre positions or is positioned between the measuring points If the stylus is not deflected within the defined path the TNC outputs an error message In SET _UP you define how far from the defined or
312. onger checks the ratio between the nominal diameter and the tool diameter This allows you to rough mill holes whose diameter is more than twice as large as the tool diameter Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Y X Example NC blocks Ol 3 9 BORE MILLING T 208 3 10 SINGLE LIP DEEP HOLE DRILLING Cycle 241 DIN ISO G241 G241 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the entered set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 Then the TNC moves the tool at the defined positioning feed rate to the set up clearance above the deepened starting point and activates the drilling soeed M3 and the coolant The TNC executes the approach motion with the direction of rotation defined in the cycle with clockwise counterclockwise or stationary spindle 3 The tool drills to the entered drilling depth at the programmed feed rate F 4 f programmed the tool remains at the hole bottom for chip breaking Then the TNC switches off the coolant and resets the drilling speed to the value defined for retraction 5 After the dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is retracted to the set up clearance at the retraction feed rate If programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX Please note while programming Program a positioning block for the startin
313. ooth of a rotating tool by positioning the tool to be measured at an offset to the center of the touch probe and then moving it toward the measuring surface of the TT until it contacts the surface The offset is programmed in the tool table under Tool offset Radius TT R_OFFS Cycle for measuring a tool during standstill e g for drills The control positions the tool to be measured over the center of the measuring surface It then moves the non rotating tool toward the measuring surface of the TT until it touches the surface To activate this function enter zero for the tool offset Radius TT R_OFFS in the tool table Cycle for measuring individual teeth The TNC pre positions the tool to be measured to a position at the side of the touch probe head The distance from the tip of the tool to the upper edge of the touch probe head is defined in of fsetToolAxis You can enter an additional offset with tool offset Length TT L_OFFS in the tool table The TNC probes the tool radially during rotation to determine the starting angle for measuring the individual teeth It then measures the length of each tooth by changing the corresponding angle of spindle orientation To activate this function program TCH PROBE 31 1 for CUTTER MEASUREMENT 534 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il Please note while programming following data on the tool into the tool table TOOL T the approximate radius the approximate length the
314. or 3 probing points 4 Use 4 measuring points standard setting 3 Use 3 measuring points gt Type of traverse Line 0 Arc 1 0365 Definition of the path function with which the tool is to move between the measuring points if traverse to clearance height Q301 1 is active 0 Move between operations on a Straight line 1 Move between operations on the pitch circle HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m X D 3 p D Z O 2a e a A g MEAS CIRCLE OUTSIDE Cycle 422 DIN ISO G422 C i G423 27 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO 17 7 MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO G423 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 423 finds the center length and width of a rectangular pocket If you define the corresponding tolerance values In the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2
315. or each axis SCALING becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active scaling factor is shown in the additional status display Resetting Program the SCALING cycle once again with a scaling factor of 1 for the same axis Please note while programming Coordinate axes sharing coordinates for arcs must be enlarged or reduced by the same factor You can program each coordinate axis with its own axis specific scaling factor In addition you can enter the coordinates of a center for all scaling factors The size of the contour is enlarged or reduced with reference to the center and not necessarily as in Cycle 11 SCALING with reference to the active datum 258 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters 25 cc Axis and scaling factor Select the coordinate axis axes by soft key and enter the factor s involved in enlarging or reducing Input range 0 000000 to 99 999999 Center coordinates Enter the center of the axis specific enlargement or reduction Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks E STEC SCALING Cycle 26 j i G80 Software Option 1 o L gt zZ 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 DIN ISO G80 Software Option 1 Effect In Cycle 19 you define the position of the working plane i e the position of the
316. or inspecting and optimizing the machine accuracy Functions for milling turning mode Switching between Milling Turning mode of operation Constant surface speed Tool tip radius compensation Turning cycles Tool management that can be changed by the machine manufacturer using Python scripts Feature content level upgrade functions Along with software options significant further improvements of the TNC software are managed via the Feature Content Level FCL upgrade functions Functions subject to the FCL are not available simply by updating the software on your TNC All upgrade functions are available to you without surcharge when you receive a new machine Upgrade functions are identified in the manual with FCL n where n indicates the sequential number of the feature content level You can purchase a code number in order to permanently enable the FCL functions For more information contact your machine tool builder or HEIDENHAIN Intended place of operation The TNC complies with the limits for a Class A device in accordance with the specifications in EN 55022 and is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Legal information This product uses open source software Further information is available on the control under Programming and Editing operating mode MOD function LICENSE INFO soft key HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TNC Model Software and Features soinjea4 pue BeMYOS IPON ONL Conten
317. or negative value 06 53 CL T G Programming TNC nc_prog PGM PAT H inition 2 2 Pattern Def Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value gt Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Number of repetitions Total number of machining SEERA PAN operations z mx rom o a sree Yen z o Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle o Pom par wa of rotation around the entered starting point il il tt tte HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 49 EF LLI E A INITION 2 2 Pattern Def Defining a single pattern PATTERN 50 If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle The Rotary pos ref ax and Rotary pos minor ax parameters are added to a previously performed rotated position of the entire pattern Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the pattern in the X axis Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the pattern in the Y axis Spacing of machining positions X incremental Distance between the machining positions in the X direction You can enter a positive or negative value Spacing of machining positions Y incremental Distance between the machining p
318. ositions in the Y direction You can enter a positive or negative value Number of columns Total number of columns in the pattern Number of lines Total number of rows in the pattern Rot position of entire pattern absolute Angle of rotation by which the entire pattern is rotated around the entered starting point Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos ref ax Angle of rotation around which only the principal axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Example NC blocks Manual operation EG Programming Gi Programmin g TNC nc_prog PGM PAT H 0 BEGIN PGM PAT MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 Y 200 Z 0 3 TOOL CALL 5 Z 82000 4 L 24100 RO FMAX M3 5 PATTERN DEF PAT1 6 END PGM PAT MM Using Fixed Cycles Defining individual frames EF O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle
319. ositions the tool at rapid traverse to the first slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate The TNC returns the tool at rapid traverse The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse to the second slot side The TNC finishes the side wall of the slot at the defined feed rate Q505 The TNC finishes half the slot width at the defined feed rate 8 The TNC positions the tool at rapid traverse back to the cycle starting point Oo oo kh W N Please note while programming Program a positioning block to the starting position with radius compensation RO before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call defines the size of the area to be machined cycle starting point ADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 333 il 13 17 N RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 Cycle parameters 334 Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance O460 Reserved currently without function Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the contour starting point diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the contour starting point Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value Contour end in Z 0494 Z coord
320. our designator for the program TRIANGLE Definition of the contour designator for the program SQUARE Contour formula Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il I O m O v A O A J o qd 09 Z 2 3 Z E O O D gt D Ss O O Q D 3 a Contour description program circle at right Contour description program circle at left Contour description program triangle at right Contour description program square at left Complex Contour Formula T O gt Q l Y 0 f i 9 2 SL cyclen Simple Contour Formula mMm D F Q 5o oS o o O O 32 oD os a Sc O og cS O a cS 9 5 5 To re dp r 9 2 SL Cycles with Simple Contour Formula Fundamentals SL cycles and the simple contour formula enable you to form contours by combining up to 9 subcontours pockets or islands in a simple manner You define the individual subcontours geometry data as separate programs In this way any subcontour can be used any number of times The TNC calculates the contour from the selected subcontours contour description programs is limited to 128 contours The number of possible contour elements depends on the type of contour inside or outside contour and the number of contour descriptions You can program up to 16384 elements The memory capacity for programming an SL cycle all Properties of the subcontours Do not program a radius compensation
321. pected after the correction of the kinematics are within the specified range Evaluation of measuring points The valuation number is a measure of the quality of the selected measuring positions The higher the valuation number the greater the benefit from optimization by the TNC The valuation of any rotary axis should not fall below a value of 2 Values greater than or equal to 4 are desirable The valuation numbers are independent of the measured deviations They are determined by the kinematics model the position and the number of measuring points per rotary axis measurement range of the rotary axis or also the number If the valuation number is too small increase the of measuring points Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il bili 7 f P I i Measurement Touch Probe Cycles k a Automatic Tool 20 1 Fundamentals Overview When running touch probe cycles Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 11 SCALING and Cycle 26 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING must not be active HEIDENHAIN only gives warranty for the function of the probing cycles if HEIDENHAIN touch probes are used 20 1 Fundamentals The TNC and the machine tool must be set up by the i machine tool builder for use of the TT touch probe Some cycles and functions may not be provided on your machine tool Refer to your machine manual In conjunction with the TNC s tool measurement cycles the tool touch probe e
322. points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Maximum limit of size for hole Q275 Maximum permissible diameter for the hole circular pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Minimum limit of size for hole Q276 Minimum permissible diameter for the hole circular pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR421 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message Tool for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0
323. programmed the tool moves to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 ee G203 3 6 UNIVERSAL DRILLING Cycle 203 DIN ISO G203 Please note while programming 72 Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 203 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth 0201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool during drilling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 0 to 99999 9999 The depth does not have to be a multiple of the plunging depth The TNC will go to depth in one movement if the plunging depth is equal to the depth the plunging depth is greater than the depth and no chip breaking is defined Dwell time at top 0210 Time in seconds that the tool remains at set up clearance after having been retracted from the hole for chip removal Input range O to 3600 0000 Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Decrem
324. prove our documentation for you Please help us by sending your requests to the following e mail address tnc userdoc heidenhain de HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 3 il TNC Model Software and Features TNC Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by TNCs as of the following NC software numbers TNC 640 340590 01 TNC 640 E 340591 01 TNC 640 Programming Station 340594 01 The suffix E indicates the export version of the TNC The export version of the TNC has the following limitations Simultaneous linear movement in up to 4 axes The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the TNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the TNC on your machine tool TNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Tool measurement with the TT Please contact your machine tool builder to become familiar with the features of your machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN offer programming courses for the TNCs We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other TNC users User s Manual All TNC functions that have no connection with cycles are described in the User s Manual of the TNC 640 Please contact HEIDENHAIN if you require a copy of this User s Manual ID of Conversational Progr
325. put range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 Dwell time at depth 0211 Time in seconds that the tool remains at the hole bottom Input range 0 to 3600 0000 gt Deepened starting point 0379 incremental with respect to the workpiece surface Starting position of drilling if a shorter tool has already pilot drilled to a certain depth The TNC moves at the feed rate for pre positioning from the set up clearance to the deepened starting point Inout range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for pre positioning Q253 Traversing velocity of the tool during positioning from the set up clearance to a deepened starting point in mm min Effective only if Q379 is entered not equal to 0 Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO m x D 3 p D Z O T e zA A Fixed Cycles Drilling il 3 9 BORE MILLING Cycle 208 Cycle run 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the programmed set up clearance above the workpiece surface and then moves the tool to the bore hole circumference on a rounded arc if enough space is available The tool mills in a helix from the current position to the first plunging depth at the programmed feed rate F When the drilling depth is reached the TNC once again traverses a full circle to remove the material remaining after the initial plunge The TNC then positions the tool at the center of the hole again Finally the TNC returns
326. q j il 13 4 Fundamentals of Turning Cycles 13 4 Fundamentals of Turning Cycles The pre positioning of the tool decisively affects the workspace of the cycle and thus the machining time During roughing the starting point for cycles corresponds to the tool position when a cycle is called When calculating the area to be machined the TNC takes into account the starting point and the end point defined in the cycle or contour defined in the cycle If the starting point lies in the area to be machined the TNC positions the tool beforehand in some cycles to set up clearance The turning direction with 81x cycles is longitudinal to the rotary axis and lateral to the rotary axis with 82x cycles The motions are contour parallel in cycle 815 The cycles can be used for inside and outside machining The TNC takes the information for this from the position of the tool or the definition in the cycle see also Working with turning cycles on page 282 In cycles with freely defined contours Cycles 810 820 and 815 the programming direction of the contour determines the direction of machining In cycles for turning you can specify the machining strategies of roughing finishing or complete machining AX Caution Danger to the workpiece and tool The turning cycles position the tool automatically to the starting point during finishing The approach strategy is influenced by the position of the tool when the cycle is called The decis
327. r should activate the angle tracking in the touch probe table TRACK column This generally increases the accuracy of measurements with a 3 D touch probe If your machine is equipped with a controlled spindle you If required deactivate the lock on the rotary axes for the duration of the calibration Otherwise it may falsify the results of measurement The machine tool manual provides further information 518 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement Backlash Backlash is a small amount of play between the rotary or angle encoder and the table that occurs when the traverse direction Is reversed If the rotary axes have backlash outside of the control loop for example because the angle measurement Is made with the motor encoder this can result in significant error during tilting With input parameter Q432 you can activate backlash measurement Enter an angle that the TNC uses as traversing angle The cycle will then carry out two measurements per rotary axis If you take over the angle value 0 the TNC will not measure any backlash The TNC does not perform an automatic backlash compensation If the measuring circle radius is lt 1 mm the TNC does not calculate the backlash The larger the measuring circle radius the more accurately the TNC can determine the rotary axis backlash see also Log function on page 525 Backlash measurement is not possible if an M function for positioning the rotary axes is se
328. r a positive or negative value Rotary pos minor ax Angle of rotation around which only the minor axis of the machining plane is distorted with respect to the entered starting point You can enter a positive or negative value Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 51 EF LLI E A INITION 2 2 Pattern Def Defining a full circle 52 If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface 0203 that you defined in the machining cycle gt Bolt hole circle center X absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the X axis gt Bolt hole circle center Y absolute Coordinate of the circle center in the Y axis gt Bolt hole circle diameter Diameter of the bolt hole circle gt Starting angle Polar angle of the first machining position Reference axis Major axis of the active machining plane e g X for tool axis Z You can enter a positive or negative value Number of repetitions Total number of machining positions on the circle gt Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin Example NC blocks TNC nc_prog PGM PAT H GI GI 2 BLK FORM 0 2 X 100 L 5 Z 2000 RO FMAX M3 6 END PGM PAT WM 0 BEGIN PGM PAT MM 1 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 0 Y 0 2 20 2 Y 200 Z 0 Using Fixed Cy
329. r continue machining see User s Manual Test Run and Program Run sections HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 EF LLI E a inition 2 2 Pattern Def Defining individual machining positions LL LLI entry with the ENT key You can enter up to 9 machining positions Confirm each LL If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle QO POINT gt X coord of machining position absolute Enter X Example NC blocks 5 coordinate gt Y coord of machining position absolute Enter Y c coordinate Workpiece surface coordinate absolute Enter Z coordinate at which machining is to begin es Oooo e ta Prog g b an TNC nc_prog PGM PAT H merom os zao vo zeo 6 END PGM PAT MM am N N 48 Using Fixed Cycles il Defining a single row EF O then this value is effective in addition to the workpiece If you have defined a workpiece surface in Z not equal to surface Q203 that you defined in the machining cycle ROW Starting point in X absolute Coordinate of the Example NC blocks starting point of the row in the X axis gt Starting point in Y absolute Coordinate of the starting point of the row in the Y axis LLI E A Spacing of machining positions incremental Distance between the machining positions You can enter a positive
330. r cycles for the following special purposes 9 DWELL TIME a Page 271 EA 12 PROGRAM CALL 12 n Page 272 13 SPINDLE ORIENTATION E Page 274 i 32 TOLERANCE a2 Page 275 ofa 270 Cycles Special Functions il 12 2 DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO G04 Function This causes the execution of the next block within a running program to be delayed by the programmed DWELL TIME A dwell time can be used for such purposes as chip breaking The cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Cycle parameters Dwell time in seconds Enter the dwell time in seconds Input range O to 3600 s 1 hour in steps of 0 001 seconds HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G04 77 HEIDENHAIN S40 AS VA lt VAN Example NC blocks DWELL TIME Cycle 9 DIN ISO G39 12 3 ee CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO 12 3 PROGRAM CALL Cycle 12 DIN ISO G39 Cycle function Routines that you have programmed such as special drilling cycles or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles Please note while programming 272 The program you are calling must be stored on the hard disk of your TNC If the program you are defining to be a cycle is located in the same directory as the program you are calling it from you need only enter the program name If the program you are defining to be a cycle is not located
331. r or break detection the TNC will lock the tool status L in TOOL 1 Parameter number for result Parameter number in which the TNC stores the status of the measurement 0 0 Tool is within the tolerance 1 0 Tool is worn RTOL exceeded 2 0 Tool is broken RBREAK exceeded If you do not wish to use the result of measurement within the program answer the dialog prompt with NO ENT Clearance height Enter the position in the spindle axis at which there is no danger of collision with the workpiece or fixtures The clearance height is referenced to the active workpiece datum If you enter such a small clearance height that the tool tip would lie below the level of the probe contact the TNC automatically positions the tool above the level of the probe contact safety zone from safetyDistStylus Inout range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Cutter measurement 0 No 1 Yes Choose whether the control is also to measure the individual teeth maximum of 20 teeth HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example Measuring a rotating tool for the first time old format Example Inspecting a tool and measuring the individual teeth and saving the status in Q5 old format Example NC blocks in new format E 20 4 Measuring the Tool Radius Cycle 32 or 482 DIN ISO G482 i G483 Tool Length and Radius Cycle 33 or 483 DIN ISO asuring 20 5 Measuring Tool Length and Radius Cycle 33 or 483 DIN ISO G483 Cycle run To
332. racts the tool to the safety clearance between the starting points Depending on which is greater the TNC uses either the spindle axis coordinate from the cycle call or the value from cycle parameter Q204 as the clearance height If you want to move at reduced feed rate when pre positioning in the spindle axis use the miscellaneous function M103 Effect of the point tables with SL cycles and Cycle 12 The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift Effect of the point tables with Cycles 200 to 208 and 262 to 267 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the hole centers If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate Q203 as 0 Effect of the point tables with Cycles 210 to 215 The TNC interprets the points as an additional datum shift If you want to use the points defined in the point table as starting point coordinates you must define the starting points and the workpiece surface coordinate 0203 in the respective milling cycle as 0 Effect of the point tables with Cycles 251 to 254 The TNC interprets the points of the working plane as coordinates of the cycle starting point If you want to use the coordinate defined in the point table for the spindle axis as the starting point coordinate you must define the workpiece surface coordinate Q203 as 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 2
333. racy of approx 1 of the misalignment ignmen 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET _UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle ISa iece M 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points and then positions the touch probe to the center of the measured hole 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and aligns the workpiece by rotating the table The TNC rotates the rotary table so that the hole center after compensation lies in the direction of the positive Y axis or on the nominal position of the hole center both with a vertical and horizontal touch probe axis The measured angular misalignment is also available in parameter Q150 Workp P l 15 7 Compensati HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 393 il Please note
334. radius compensation E In the contour formula the areas A and B are processed with the intersection with function Contour definition program 9 1 SL Cycles Contour machining with SL Cycles The complete contour is machined with the SL Cycles 20 to 24 see Overview on page 171 N 20 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Definition of workpiece blank Tool definition of roughing cutter Tool definition of finishing cutter Tool call of roughing cutter Retract the tool Specify contour definition program Define general machining parameters 221 Complex Contour Formula T O gt Q l Y 0 Complex Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles O O ot O Cc Q 49 p a O O om O Q eb 3 a gt Q O ot O Cc h O y 3 z N 22 Cycle definition Rough out Cycle call Rough out Tool call of finishing cutter Cycle definition Floor finishing Cycle call Floor finishing Cycle definition Side finishing Cycle call Side finishing Retract in the tool axis end program Contour definition program Definition of the contour designator for the program CIRCLE1 Assignment of values for parameters used in PGM CIRCLE31XY Definition of the contour designator for the program CIRCLE31XY Definition of the cont
335. rameters 428 16 9 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO G415 431 Cycle run 431 Please note while programming 432 Cycle parameters 432 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 29 il 30 16 10 DATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO G416 435 Cycle run 435 Please note while programming 436 Cycle parameters 436 16 11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO G417 439 Cycle run 439 Please note while programming 439 Cycle parameters 440 16 12 DATUM AT CENTER OF 4 HOLES Cycle 418 DIN ISO G418 441 Cycle run 441 Please note while programming 442 Cycle parameters 442 16 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 445 Cycle run 445 Please note while programming 445 Cycle parameters 446 17 1 Fundamentals 454 Overview 454 Recording the results of measurement 455 Measurement results in Q parameters 457 Classification of results 457 Tolerance monitoring 458 Tool monitoring 458 Reference system for measurement results 459 17 2 REF PLANE Cycle 0 DIN ISO G55 460 Cycle run 460 Please note while programming 460 Cycle parameters 460 17 3 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 461 Cycle run 461 Please note while programming 461 Cycle parameters 462 17 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO G420 463 Cycle run 463
336. rammed starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the positive direction of the touch probe axis 2 Then the touch probe moves in its own axis to the coordinate entered as touch point 1 and measures the actual position with a simple probing movement 3 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below Q160 Actual value of measured point Please note while programming tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC then sets Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a the datum in this axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G417 16 11 a IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO S il m Cycle parameters q 417 gt 1st meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute g et Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference a axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to y 99999 9999 gt Ist meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 1st meas point 3rd axis Q294 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the touch probe axis Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance Q320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball t
337. ransfer to the corresponding machine parameter Offset error in Z direction for manual transfer to the corresponding machine parameter Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Positioning direction The positioning direction of the rotary axis to be measured is 2 determined from the start angle and the end angle that you define in S the cycle A reference measurement is automatically performed at O Specify the start and end angles to ensure that the same position is nA not measured twice A duplicated point measurement e g measuring positions 90 and 270 is not advisable but it does not cause an LO error message D Example Start angle 90 end angle 90 Start angle 90 End angle 90 No of measuring points 4 Stepping angle resulting from the calculation 90 90 4 1 60 Measuring point 1 90 Measuring point 2 30 Measuring point 3 30 Measuring point 4 90 Example start angle 90 end angle 270 Start angle 90 End angle 270 No of measuring points 4 Stepping angle resulting from the calculation 270 90 4 1 60 Measuring point 1 90 Measuring point 2 150 Measuring point 3 210 Measuring point 4 270 9 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 4 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 515 il T Machines with Hirth coupled axes 2 5 iN Danger of collision In order to be positioned the axis m
338. ration 2 only finishing then the TNC positions the tool in the center of the pocket at rapid traverse to the first plunging depth HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle 252 DIN ISO j il G252 5 3 CIRCULAR POCKET Cycle os MN ISO Cycle parameters 252 136 Machining operation 0 1 2 Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing Side finishing and floor finishing are only executed if the finishing allowances 0368 Q369 have been defined Circle diameter Q223 Diameter of the finished pocket Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side 0368 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range O to 99999 999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of pocket Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for floor Q369 incremental value Finishing allowance in the tool axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99
339. rdinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Path overlap factor Q370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Inout range 0 1 to 1 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle Gs ii k i 5 8 Programming Examples 5 8 Progra ino Examples Definition of workpiece blank Call the tool for roughing finishing Retract the tool 156 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 6 L X 50 Y 50 7 CYCL DEF 252 CIRCULAR POCKET RO M3 M99 Q215 0 sMACHINING OPERATION Q223 50 CIRCLE DIAMETER Q368 0 2 ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q207 500 FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q351 1 CLIMB OR UP CUT Q201 30 DEPTH Q202 5 PLUNGING DEPTH Q369 0 1 ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR Q206 150 FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG Q338 5 INFEED FOR FINISHING Q200 2 SET UP CLEARANCE Q203 0 SURFACE COORDINATE Q204 50 2ND SET UP CLEARANCE Q370 1 TOOL PATH OVERLAP Q366 1 PLUNGE Q385 750 FEED RATE FOR FINISHING Call cycle for machining the contour outside Define CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING cycle 5 CYCL DEF 256 RECTANGULAR STUD Define cycle for machining the contour outside 2 Q218 90 1ST SIDE LENGTH O Q424 100 WORKPC BLANK SIDE 1 Q219 80 2ND SIDE LENGTH V Q425 100 WO
340. rdinate of the second touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point 2nd axis Q266 absolute Coordinate of the second touch point in the minor axis Q263 of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis 3 Touch probe axis measuring axis Traverse direction 1 0267 Direction in which the probe is to approach the workpiece 1 Negative traverse direction 1 Positive traverse direction Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET _UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 0265 02725 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at cl
341. rdinate of the starting point is less than the contour starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs the infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 o i A TURN CONTOUR PARALLEL Cycle 815 Cycle parameters Machining operation 0215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Q484 Q478 SLT Q463 Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Oversize for blank 0485 Contour parallel oversize Q460 for the defined contour Cut lines 0486 Define the type of cut lines 0 Cuts with constant chip cross section 1 Equidistant proportioning of cuts Q483 Reverse contour 0499 Define the machining direction of the contour 0 The contour is machined in the programmed direction 1 The contour is machined inversely to the programmed direction Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed radius value in radial direction The infeed
342. rection is defined by the polar angle entered in the cycle 3 After the TNC has saved the position the probe returns to the Starting point The TNC also stores the coordinates of the touch probe position at the time of the triggering signal in parameters Q115 to Q119 Please note while programming Danger of collision Pre position the touch probe in order to avoid a collision when the programmed pre positioning point is approached The probing axis defined in the cycle specifies the probing plane Probing axis X X Y plane Probing axis Y Y Z plane Probing axis Z Z X plane HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 17 3 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 i il 17 3 POLAR REFERENCE PLANE Cycle 1 Cycle parameters 462 Probing axis Enter the probing axis with the axis selection keys or ASCII keyboard Confirm your entry with the ENT key Input range X Y or Z Probing angle Angle measured from the probing axis at which the touch probe is to move Input range 180 0000 to 180 0000 Nominal position value Use the axis selection keys or the ASCII keyboard to enter all coordinates of the nominal pre positioning point values for the touch probe Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt To conclude the input press the ENT key Example NC blocks Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 17 4 MEASURE ANGLE Cycle 420 DIN ISO G420 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 420 measures the angle th
343. remental Distance between third and fourth measuring points in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Corner 0308 Number identifying the corner which the TNC is to set as datum Input range 1 to 4 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement Is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET _UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points lt p 0 Move at measuring height between measuring D points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points O 2 gt Z m V gt cc Lu cc O Q LL O Lu Y Execute basic rotation Q304 Definition of whether the TNC should compensate workpiece misalignment with a basic rotation 0 No basic rotation 1 Basic rotation Datum number in table Q305 Enter the datum number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordi
344. retracts at rapid traverse FMAX to the starting position and advances again to the first plunging depth minus the advanced stop distance t 3 The advanced stop distance is automatically calculated by the control At a total hole depth up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm At a total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm 4 The tool then advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate F 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the programmed depth is reached 6 After a dwell time at the hole bottom the tool is returned to the Starting position at rapid traverse FMAX for chip breaking Application Cycle 21 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the allowance for side and the allowance for floor as well as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for roughing Please note while programming Before programming note the following When calculating the infeed points the TNC does not account for the delta value DR programmed in a TOOL CALL block In narrow areas the TNC may not be able to carry out pilot drilling with a tool that is larger than the rough out tool HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G121 7 5 PILOT DRILLING E i 21 DIN ISO i il G121 7 5 PILOT DRILLING ae 21 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 21 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Dimension by which the tool drills in each infeed negative si
345. rface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 2nd axis Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Number of cuts Q240 Number of passes to be made over the width Input range O to 99999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving from set up clearance to the milling depth in mm min Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q207 Traversing speed of the tool during milling in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Stepover feed rate Q209 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min when moving to the next pass If you are moving the tool transversely in the material enter Q209 to be smaller than Q207 If you are moving it transversely in the open Q209 may be greater than Q207 Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and milling depth for positioning at the start and end of the cycle Input range O to 99999 9999 MNE 2207 Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling il 10 3 RULED SURFACE Cycle 231 DIN ISO G231 Cycle run 1 From the current position the TNC positions the tool in a linear 3 D movement to the starting point 1 2 The tool subsequently advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling 3 From this point the tool moves at rapid traverse FMAX
346. ring tolerance is adjusted relative to the size of the tool radius This ensures a sufficient feed rate for probing even with large tool radii The TNC adjusts the measuring tolerance according to the following table Up to 30 mm measureTolerancel 30 to 60 mm 2 measureTolerancel 60 to 90 mm 3 measureTolerancel 90 to 120 mm 4 measureTolerancel 530 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement il probingFeedCalc ConstantFeed The feed rate for probing remains constant the error of measurement however rises linearly with the increase in tool radius Measuring tolerance r measureTolerancel 5 mm where r Active tool radius in mm measureTolerancel Maximum permissible error of measurement Entries in the tool table TOOL T CUT LTOL RTOL DIRECT R OFFS L OFFS LBREAK RBREAK Number of teeth 20 teeth maximum Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range 0 to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool radius R for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the TNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Cutting direction of the tool for measuring the tool during rotation Tool length measurement Tool offset between stylus center and tool center Default setting No value entered offset tool radius Tool radius measurement tool offset in addition to of fsetToolAxis
347. rmined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use Is entered by the TNC when old programs are read in see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system OUTSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 414 DIN ISO TE lt x O co T HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 429 il Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New
348. robe table 371 Orient the infrared touch probe to the programmed probe direction TRACK in touch probe table 371 Touch trigger probe probing feed rate F in touch probe table 372 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FMAX 37 2 Touch trigger probe rapid traverse for positioning FLPREPOS in touch probe table 372 Multiple measurements olz Confidence interval of multiple measurements 372 Executing touch probe cycles 373 14 3 Touch Probe Table 374 General information 374 Editing touch probe tables 374 Touch probe data 375 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 27 il 15 1 Fundamentals 378 Overview 378 Characteristics common to all touch probe cycles for measuring workpiece misalignment 379 15 2 BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO G400 380 Cycle run 380 Please note while programming 380 Cycle parameters 381 15 3 BASIC ROTATION from Two Holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO G401 383 Cycle run 383 Please note while programming 383 Cycle parameters 384 15 4 BASIC ROTATION over Two Studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO G402 386 Cycle run 386 Please note while programming 386 Cycle parameters 387 15 5 BASIC ROTATION Compensation via Rotary Axis Cycle 403 DIN ISO 6403 389 Cycle run 389 Please note while programming 389 Cycle parameters 390 15 6 SET BASIC ROTATION Cycle 404 DIN ISO
349. rst axis Multipass milling is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted at FMAX to the set up clearance Please note while programming the starting point first in the working plane and then in the spindle axis From the current position the TNC positions the tool at Pre position the tool in such a way that no collision between tool and clamping devices can occur HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G230 10 2 MULTIPASS i Cycle 230 DIN ISO f il G230 10 2 MULTIPASS vine Cycle 230 DIN ISO m x D 3 poe O e e o A Cycle parameters 230 Starting point in lst axis Q225 absolute Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Starting point in 2nd axis Q226 absolute Minimum point coordinate of the surface to be multipass milled in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Starting point in 3rd axis 0227 absolute Height in the spindle axis at which multipass milling is carried out Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 First side length 0218 incremental Length of the surface to be multipass milled in the reference axis of the working plane referenced to the starting point in the 1st axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Second side length 0219 incremental Length of the su
350. rting point the programmed length and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The motion to the next line occurs within the workpiece borders The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the tool plunges to the next machining depth In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance Strategy 0389 2 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis to the set up clearance over the current infeed depth and then moves at the ore positioning feed rate directly back to the starting point in the next line The TNC calculates the offset from the programmed width the tool radius
351. s an ASCII file in the directory TNC you wish to output the measuring log via the data Use the HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNCremo if interface HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 17 1 Fundamentals o il 17 1 Fundamentals Example Measuring log for touch probe cycle 421 Measuring log for Probing Cycle 421 Hole Measuring Date 30 06 2005 Time 6 55 04 Measuring program TNC GEH35712 CHECK1 H Nominal values Center in reference axis 50 0000 Center in minor axis 65 0000 Diameter 12 0000 Given limit values Max limit for center in reference axis 50 1000 Min limit for center in reference axis 49 9000 Max limit for center in minor axis 65 1000 Min limit for center in minor axis 64 9000 Maximum dimension for hole 12 0450 Minimum dimension for hole 12 0000 Actual values Center in reference axis 50 0810 Center in minor axis 64 9530 Diameter 12 0259 Deviations Center in reference axis 0 0810 Center in minor axis 0 0470 Diameter 0 0259 Further measuring results Measuring height 5 0000 End of measuring log 456 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measurement results in Q parameters N The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch liana operations Programing probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160 T Deviations from the nominal value are saved in the parameters Q161 EIET to Q166 Note the table of result p
352. s containing Cycles 410 to 418 created with an older software version on an iITNC 530 did not specifically define the measured value transfer with parameter Q303 when defining the cycle 16 1 Fundamentals In these cases the TNC outputs an error message since the complete handling of REF referenced datum tables has changed You must define a measured value transfer yourself with parameter 0303 Q305 not equal to 0 Q303 0 The TNC writes the calculated datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system The value of parameter Q305 determines the datum number Activate the datum with Cycle 7 in the part program Q305 not equal to 0 0303 1 The TNC writes the calculated datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF coordinates The value of parameter Q305 determines the preset number Activate the preset with Cycle 247 in the part program Measurement results in Q parameters The TNC saves the measurement results of the respective touch probe cycle in the globally effective Q parameters Q150 to Q160 You can use these parameters In your program Note the table of result parameters listed with every cycle description 402 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 2 SLOT CENTER REF PT Cycle 408 DIN ISO G408 G408 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 408 finds the center of a slot and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC
353. s for the rotary axis X coordinates can be entered as desired either in degrees or in mm or inches Specify this with Q17 in the cycle definition 1 The TNC positions the tool over the cutter infeed point taking the allowance for side into account 2 At the first plunging depth the tool mills along the programmed contour at the milling feed rate O12 3 At the end of the contour the TNC returns the tool to the set up clearance and returns to the point of penetration 4 Steps 1 to 3 are repeated until the programmed milling depth Q1 is reached 5 Then the tool moves to the set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DINS Ga 127 Software Option 1 j il 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN ISO G127 Software Option 1 Please note while programming Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il Cycle parameters gt Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between the cylindrical surface and the floor of the contour Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the plane of the unrolled cylindrical surface This allowance is effective in the direction of the radius compensation Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance O6 incremental Distance between the tool tip and the cylinder surface Input range O0 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 9
354. s per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 p D lt O za e a A 13 8 TURN _ PLUNGE EXTENDED Cycle 814 30 13 9 E CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 13 9 TURN CONTOUR LONGITUDINAL Cycle 810 Application This cycle enables you to run longitudinal turning of workpieces with any turning contours The contour description is in a subprogram You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the contour the cycle runs outside machining If the starting point of the contour is less than the end point of the contour the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 he TNC machines the area between the starting position and the end point in longitudinal direction The longitudinal cut is run paraxially with the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed r
355. sal pecking i il Page 79 Overview Overview 206 207 208 209 220 221 230 231 232 240 241 247 251 252 253 254 256 257 262 263 264 265 267 542 Tapping with a floating tap holder new Rigid tapping new Bore milling Tapping with chip breaking Polar pattern Cartesian pattern Multipass milling Ruled surface Face milling Centering Single lip deep hole drilling Datum setting Rectangular pocket complete machining Circular pocket complete machining Slot milling Circular slot Rectangular stud complete machining Circular stud complete machining Thread milling Thread milling countersinking Thread drilling milling Helical thread drilling milling Outside thread milling Page 95 Page 97 Page 83 Page 100 Page 161 Page 164 Page 229 Page 231 Page 235 Page 61 Page 86 Page 251 Page 129 Page 134 Page 138 Page 143 Page 148 Page 152 Page 105 Page 108 Page 112 Page 116 Page 120 Turning cycles 800 801 810 811 812 813 814 815 820 821 822 823 824 830 831 832 860 361 862 870 371 872 Adapt rotary coordinate system Reset rotary coordinate system Turn contour longitudinal Turn shoulder longitudinal Turn shoulder longitudinal extended Turn longitudinal plunge Turn longitudinal plunge extended Turn contour parallel Turn contour transverse Turn shoulder face Turn shoulder face extended Turn transverse plunge Turn transverse plunge
356. save the determined basic rotation If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically places the determined basic rotation in the ROT menu of the Manual Operation mode The parameter has no effect if the misalignment is to be compensated by a rotation of the rotary table Q402 1 In this case the misalignment is not saved as an angular value Input range 0 to 2999 gt Compensation 0402 Specify whether the TNC should compensate the measured misalignment with a basic rotation or by rotating the rotary table 0 Set basic rotation 1 Rotate the rotary table When you select rotary table the TNC does not save the measured misalignment not even when you have defined a table line in parameter Q305 G401 ATION from Two Holes Cycle 401 DIN ISO gt Set to zero after alignment 0337 Definition of whether the TNC should set the display of the aligned rotary axis to zero 0 Do not reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment 1 Reset the display of the rotary axis to O after alignment The TNC sets the display to 0 only if you have defined Q402 1 cc Y lt aa a LO q HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 385 il 15 4 BASIC ROTATION over Two Studs Cycle 402 DIN ISO G402 G402 Cycle run The Touch Probe Cycle 402 measures the centers of two studs Then the TNC calculates the angle between the reference axis in the working plane and the line connecting the two stud centers With the basic rotation function the TNC compe
357. saves the actual values in the following Q parameters INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q154 Actual value of length in the reference axis 0155 Actual value of length in the minor axis LL lt m T 410 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Please note while programming Danger of collision To prevent a collision between touch probe and workpiece enter low estimates for the lengths of the first and second sides If the dimensions of the pocket and the safety clearance do not permit pre positioning In the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the pocket In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the four measuring points Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst side length 0323 incremental Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Inout range 0 to 99999 9999 2nd side length 03724 incremental Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of t
358. saves the machine geometry in the respective machine constants of the kinematics description 1 Clamp the calibration sphere and check for potential collisions 2 Inthe Manual Operation mode set the datum in the center of the sphere or if Q431 1 or Q431 3 is defined In the touch probe axis manually position the touch probe over the calibration sphere and in the working plane over the sphere center 3 Select the Program Run mode and start the calibration program 4 The TNC automatically measures all three axes successively in the resolution you defined 5 The TNC saves the measured values in the following Q parameters Q141 Standard deviation measured in the A axis 1 if axis was not measured Q142 Standard deviation measured in the B axis 1 if axis was not measured Q143 Standard deviation measured in the C axis 1 if axis was not measured Q144 Optimized standard deviation in the A axis 1 if axis was not optimized 0145 Optimized standard deviation in the B axis 1 if axis was not optimized 0146 Optimized standard deviation in the C axis 1 if axis was not optimized HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G451 Option 9 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO 4 i il G451 Option 9 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO Q147 Q148 Q149 514 Offset error in X direction for manual transfer to the corresponding machine parameter Offset error in Y direction for manual t
359. se measuring certainty the TNC can run each probing process up to three times in sequence Define the number of measurements In machine parameter Probe Settings gt Configuration of probe behavior gt Automatic mode Multiple measurements with probe function If the measured position values differ too greatly the TNC outputs an error message the limit value is defined in Confidence interval of multiple measurements VVith multiple measurement it is possible to detect random errors e g from contamination If the measured values lie within the confidence interval the TNC saves the mean value of the measured positions Confidence interval of multiple measurements When you perform a multiple measurement you store the value that the measured values may vary in Probe Settings gt Configuration of probe behavior gt Automatic mode Confidence interval of multiple measurements If the difference in the measured values exceeds the value defined by you the TNC outputs an error message 372 Using Touch Probe Cycles il Executing touch probe cycles All touch probe cycles are DEF active This means that the TNC runs the cycle automatically as soon as the TNC executes the cycle definition in the program run i Danger of collision When running touch probe cycles no cycles must be active for coordinate transformation Cycle 7 DATUM Cycle 8 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 10 ROTATION and Cycles 11 and 26 SCALING an active basic rotati
360. see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F The first probing is always in the negative direction of the programmed axis 3 Then the touch probe moves at clearance height to the next Starting position and probes the second touch point 4 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviation in the following Q parameters Q156 Actual value of measured length 0157 Actual value of the centerline Q166 Deviation of the measured length Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G426 a MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 DIN ISO j il G426 Hho MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 486 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd meas point lst axis Q265 absolute Coordinate
361. set table Inout range O to 65535 Status displays In the additional status display POS DISP STATUS the TNC shows the active preset number behind the datum dialog HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G247 O Y Z m N N gt g Z 11 4 DATU Example NC blocks G28 11 5 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO 11 5 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO G28 Effect The TNC can machine the mirror image of a contour in the working plane The mirroring cycle becomes effective as soon as It is defined in the program It is also effective in the Positioning with MDI mode of operation The active mirrored axes are shown in the additional status display If you mirror only one axis the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in SL cycles If you mirror two axes the machining direction remains the same The result of the mirroring depends on the location of the datum If the datum lies on the contour to be mirrored the element simply flips over If the datum lies outside the contour to be mirrored the element also jumps to another location Resetting Program the MIRROR IMAGE cycle once again with NO ENT Please note while programming reversed for the milling cycles Cycles 2xx Exception Cycle 208 in which the direction defined in the cycle applies If you mirror only one axis the machining direction is 252 Cycles Coordinate Transformations il Cycle parameters
362. sible width of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 2nd side length 0287 Minimum permissible width of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 1st axis Q279 Permissible position deviation in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Tolerance for center 2nd axis Q280 Permissible position deviation in the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Se URTECEHRROBE TE Q320 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Measuring log 0281 Definition of whether the TNC is to create a measuring log 0 No measuring log 1 Generate measuring log the TNC saves the log file TCHPR423 TXT by default in the directory TNC 2 Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Resume program run with NC Start G423 gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not Interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message Tool for monitoring 0330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T m X D 3 p D Z O 2a e a A i MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycl
363. sitions in all main axes since the position of the tool at the end of the cycle is not identical to the position of the tool at the start of the cycle 188 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Cycle parameters gt Milling depth Q1 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and contour floor Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Finishing allowance for side O3 incremental Finishing allowance in the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Ob absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Clearance height O7 absolute Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for tool retraction at the end of the cycle Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q10 incremental Infeed per cut Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Feed rate for plunging O11 Traversing speed of the tool in the spindle axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ gt Feed rate for milling Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 alternatively FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut Up cut 1 Q15 Climb milling Input value 1 Up cut milling Input value 1 To enable climb milling and up cut milling alternately in several infeeds Input value 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G
364. st side length Q282 Pocket length parallel to the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to o2 e 99999 9999 2nd side length Q283 Pocket length parallel to the minor axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 027320279 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G423 i MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO k il G423 _s MEAS RECTAN INSIDE Cycle 423 DIN ISO 476 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tio Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points Max size limit 1st side length 0284 Maximum permissible length of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Min size limit 1st side length 0285 Minimum permissible length of the pocket Input range O to 99999 9999 Max size limit 2nd side length Q286 Maximum permis
365. surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt 2nd set up clearance 0204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Infeed depth for chip breaking 0257 incremental Depth at which TNC carries out chip breaking Input range 0 to 99999 9999 gt Retraction rate for chip breaking 0256 The TNC multiplies the pitch Q239 by the programmed value and retracts the tool by the calculated value during chip breaking If you enter Q256 0 the TNC retracts the tool completely from the hole to the set up clearance for chip breaking Input range 0 1000 to 99999 9999 Angle for spindle orientation 0336 absolute Angle at which the TNC positions the tool before machining the thread This allows you to regroove the thread If required Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 gt RPM factor for retraction 0403 Factor by which the TNC increases the spindle soeed and therefore also the retraction feed rate when retracting trom the drill hole Inout range 0 0001 to 10 the speed is increased at most to the maximum speed of the active gear range Retracting after a program interruption If you interrupt program run during thread cutting with the machine stop button the TNC will display the MANUAL OPERATION soft key If you press the MANUAL OPERATION key you can retract the tool under program control Simply press the positive axis dir
366. t With Q21 you define the permitted deviation from this ideal slot The number of subsequent milling operations depends on the cylinder radius the tool used and the slot depth The smaller the tolerance Is defined the more exact the slot is and the longer the remachining takes Recommendation Use a tolerance of 0 02 mm Function inactive Enter O default setting Input range O to 9 9999 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 8 4 CYLINDER SURFACE Ridge Milling Cycle 29 DIN ISO G129 Software Option 1 Cycle run This cycle enables you to program a ridge In two dimensions and then transfer it onto a cylindrical surface With this cycle the TNC adjusts the tool so that with radius compensation active the walls of the slot are always parallel Program the midpoint path of the ridge together with the tool radius compensation With the radius compensation you specify whether the TNC cuts the ridge with climb milling or up cut milling At the ends of the ridge the TNC always adds a semicircle whose radius is half the ridge width 1 The TNC positions the tool over the starting point of machining The TNC calculates the starting point from the ridge width and the tool diameter It is located next to the first point defined in the contour subprogram offset by half the ridge width and the tool diameter The radius compensation determines whether machining begins from the left 1 RL climb milling or the ri
367. t Contour subprogram 2 right pocket Contour subprogram 3 square left island Contour subprogram 4 triangular right island Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il Examples HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Definition of workpiece blank Tool call Diameter 20 Retract the tool Define contour subprogram Define machining parameters Cycle call Retract in the tool axis end program D 7 10 i i Contour subprogram 7 10 amming Examples 96 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket il 8 1 Fundamentals 8 1 Fundamentals Overview of cylindrical surface cycles 27 CYLINDER SURFACE 5 Page 199 AJ 28 CYLINDER SURFACE slot milling z Page 202 z 29 CYLINDER SURFACE ridge milling Page 205 198 Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface il 8 2 CYLINDER SURFACE Cycle 27 DIN ISO G127 Software Option 1 Execution of cycle This cycle enables you to program a contour in two dimensions and then roll it onto a cylindrical surface for 3 D machining Use Cycle 28 if you want to mill guideways on the cylinder The contour is described in a subprogram identified in Cycle 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY In the subprogram you always describe the contour with the coordinates X and Y regardless of which rotary axes exist on your machine This means that the contour description is independent of your machine configuration The path functions L CHF CR RND and CT are available The dimension
368. t in machine parameter mStrobeRotAxPos or if the axis is a Hirth axis HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G451 Option a MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO j il G451 Option 19 4 MEASURE KINEMATICS Cycle 451 DIN ISO Please note while programming 520 Note that all functions for tilting in the working plane are reset M128 and FUNCTION TCPM are deactivated Position the calibration sphere on the machine table so that there can be no collisions during the measuring process Before defining the cycle you must set the datum in the center of the calibration sphere and activate it or you define the input parameter 0431 correspondingly to 1 or 3 If machine parameter mStrobeRotAxPos is defined as not equal 1 M function positions the rotary axis then only start a measurement when all rotary axes are at O For the positioning feed rate when moving to the probing height in the touch probe axis the TNC uses the value from cycle parameter Q253 or the FMAX value whichever is smaller The TNC always moves the rotary axes at positioning feed rate Q253 while the probe monitoring is inactive If the kinematic data attained in the Optimize mode are greater than the permissible limit maxModification the TNC shows a warning Then you have to confirm acceptance of the attained value by pressing NC start Note that a change in the kinematics always changes the preset as well After an optimization reset the preset
369. t in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET _UP touch probe table and is only effective when the datum is probed in the touch probe axis Input range 0 to 99999 9999 G416 m x D 3 O T e zA A ATUM CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO 16 438 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 11 DATUM IN TOUCH PROBE AXIS Cycle 417 DIN ISO G417 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 417 measures any coordinate in the touch probe axis and defines it as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the measured coordinate in a datum table or preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the prog
370. t line 1 of the workpiece and to establish the reference to the actual 0 direction 2 15 1 Fundamentals HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 379 il G400 2 BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO 15 2 BASIC ROTATION Cycle 400 DIN ISO G400 Cycle run Touch probe cycle 400 determines a workpiece misalignment by measuring two points which must lie on a straight surface With the basic rotation function the TNC compensates the measured value 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the programmed starting point 1 The TNC offsets the touch probe by the safety clearance in the direction opposite the defined traverse direction 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves to the next starting position 2 and probes the second position 4 The TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and performs the basic rotation Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC will reset an active basic rotation at the beginning of the cycle 380 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il Cycle parameters lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point
371. t range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G409 DATUM RIDGE CENTER Cycle 409 DIN ISO o i 16 4 DATUM FROM INSIDE OF RECTANGLE Cycle 410 DIN ISO G410 G410 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 410 finds the center of a rectangular pocket and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates Into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch probe cycles on page 373 to the starting point 1 The TNC calculates the touch points from the data in the cycle and the safety clearance from the SET_UP column of the touch probe table 2 Then the touch probe moves to the entered measuring height and probes the first touch point at the probing feed rate column F 3 Then the touch probe moves either paraxially at the measuring height or linearly at the clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 6 lf desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis in a separate probing and
372. t the positioning feed rate to the first plunging depth calculated by the control Strategy 0389 0 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies outside the surface The control calculates the end point from the programmed starting point the programmed length the programmed safety clearance to the side and the tool radius The TNC offsets the tool to the starting point in the next pass at the pre positioning feed rate The offset is calculated from the programmed width the tool radius and the maximum path overlap factor The tool then moves back in the direction of the starting point 1 The process is repeated until the programmed surface has been completed At the end of the last pass the tool plunges to the next machining depth In order to avoid non productive motions the surface is then machined in reverse direction The process is repeated until all infeeds have been machined In the last infeed simply the finishing allowance entered is milled at the finishing feed rate At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at FMAX to the 2nd set up clearance HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G232 10 4 FACE _ Cycle 232 DIN ISO j il G232 10 4 FACE me Cycle 232 DIN ISO Strategy Q389 1 3 The tool then advances to the stopping point 2 at the feed rate for milling The end point lies within the surface The TNC calculates the end point from the programmed sta
373. tation direction If you program M136 before a cycle the TNC interprets feed rate values in the cycle in mm rev and without M136 in mm min If turning cycles are executed during inclined machining M144 the angles of the tool to the contour change The TNC automatically takes these modifications into account and thus also monitors the machining in inclined state to prevent contour damage Some cycles machine contours that you have written in a subprogram You program these contours with plain language path functions or FK functions Before calling the cycle you must program the cycle 14 CONTOUR to define the subprogram number You must call turning cycles 81x 87x with CYCL CALL or M99 Before calling a cycle be sure to program Turning mode FUNCTION MODE TURN Tool call TOOL CALL Direction of rotation of turning spindle e g M303 Selection of speed cutting soeed FUNCTION TURNDATA SPIN If you use feed rate per revolution mm rev M136 Tool positioning to suitable starting point e g L X 130 Y 0 RO FMAX Adaptation of coordinate system and align tool CYCL DEF 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM 282 Cycles Turning il 13 2 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 800 Application available for aligning the tool Refer to your machine A Your machine manufacturer may make own functions manual Before carrying out turning operations you must correctly position the tool orient the tool tip To bring the tool into s
374. ted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks 331 13 16 RADIAL RECESSING Cycle 861 132 17 piaL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 13 17 RADIAL RECESSING EXTENDED Cycle 862 Application This cycle enables you to radially cut in slots Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end In the cycle you can define angles for the side walls of the slot You can insert radii in the contour edges You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning is run paraxially with roughing The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is larger than the end diameter 0493 the cycle runs outside machining If the start diameter 0491 is less than the end diameter Q493 the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse lateral infeed 0 8 tool edge width 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point in axial direction at the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 4 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 3 until the slot width is reached 5 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point 332 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run 1 The TNC p
375. ternal thread 1 Internal thread Thread orientation 0461 Define direction of the thread pitch 0 Longitudinal parallel to rotary axis 1 Transverse perpendicular to rotary axis Set up clearance 0460 Set up clearance perpendicular to thread pitch Thread pitch 0472 Pitch of the thread Depth of thread 0473 Depth of the thread If you enter 0 the depth is assumed for a metric thread lc spent arama enema based on the pitch Runout of thread 0474 Length of the path on which at the end of the thread the tool is lifted from the current plunging depth to the thread diameter Q460 Approach path 0465 Length of the path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are accelerated to the required velocity The approach path is outside of the defined thread contour Overrun path O466 Length of the path in pitch direction on which the feed axes are decelerated The overrun path is outside the defined thread contour Maximum cutting depth 0453 Maximum plunging depth perpendicular to the thread pitch Angle of infeed 0467 Angle for the infeed Q453 The reference angle is formed by the parallel line to the thread pitch a a a aa eee THREAD Cycle 830 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 361 il TTT THREAD Cycle 830 2 362 gt Type of infeed O468 Define the type of infeed 0 Constant chip cross section the infeed decreases with the depth 1 Constant plunging depth gt Starting angle 0470 Angle of the turning
376. th NC Start gt PGM stop if tolerance error Q309 Definition of whether in the event of a violation of tolerance limits the TNC is to interrupt program run and output an error message 0 Do not interrupt program run no error message 1 Interrupt program run output an error message gt Tool for monitoring Q330 Definition of whether the TNC is to monitor the tool see Tool monitoring on page 458 Input range 0 to 32767 9 alternatively tool name with max 16 characters 0 Monitoring not active gt 0 Tool number in the tool table TOOL T gt Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip 0320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Traversing to clearance height 0301 Definition of how the touch probe is to move between the measuring points 0 Move at measuring height between measuring points 1 Move at clearance height between measuring points 484 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 17 10 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH Cycle 426 DIN ISO G426 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 426 measures the position and width of a ridge It you define the corresponding tolerance values in the cycle the TNC makes a nominal to actual value comparison and saves the deviation value in system parameters 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic
377. th stepover if B7 O multiple passes are required 128 Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling il 5 2 RECTANGULAR POCKET Cycle 251 DIN ISO G251 Cycle run Use Cycle 251 RECTANGULAR POCKET to completely machine rectangular pockets Depending on the cycle parameters the following machining alternatives are available Complete machining Roughing floor finishing side finishing Only roughing Only floor finishing and side finishing Only floor finishing Only side finishing Roughing 1 The tool plunges into the workpiece at the pocket center and advances to the first plunging depth Specify the plunging strategy with parameter O366 2 The TNC roughs out the pocket from the inside out taking the overlap factor Parameter 0370 and the finishing allowances parameters Q368 and Q369 into account 3 At the end of the roughing operation the TNC moves the tool tangentially away from the pocket wall then moves by the set up clearance above the current infeed depth and returns from there at rapid traverse to the pocket center 4 This process is repeated until the programmed pocket depth is reached Finishing 5 Inasmuch as finishing allowances are defined the TNC then finishes the pocket walls in multiple infeeds if so specified The pocket wall is approached tangentially 6 Then the TNC finishes the floor of the pocket from the inside out The pocket floor is approached tangentially HEIDENH
378. the contour points unless any special machine settings limit the programmed feed rate You will achieve optimal smoothing if in Cycle 32 you choose a tolerance value between 110 and 200 of the CAM chord error 276 CAM PP INC Cycles Special Functions il Please note while programming HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 u TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO G62 o i G62 gt TOLERANCE Cycle 32 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 278 Tolerance value T Permissible contour deviation in mm or inches with inch programming Input range O to 99999 9999 HSC MODE Finishing 0 Roughing 1 Activate filter Input value O Milling with increased contour accuracy The TNC uses internally defined finishing filter settings Input value 1 Milling at an increased feed rate The TNC uses internally defined roughing filter settings Tolerance for rotary axes TA Permissible position error of rotary axes in degrees when M128 is active FUNCTION TCPM The TNC always reduces the feed rate in such a way that if more than one axis is traversed the slowest axis moves at its maximum feed rate Rotary axes are usually much slower than linear axes You can significantly reduce the machining time for programs for more than one axis by entering a large tolerance value e g 10 since the TNC does not always have to move the rotary axis to the given nominal position The contour will not be damaged by entering a rotary axis tolerance va
379. the workpiece 1 The TNC positions the tool in the spindle axis at rapid traverse FMAX to the set up clearance above the workpiece surface 2 The TNC then orients the spindle to the 0 position with an oriented spindle stop and displaces the tool by the off center distance 3 The tool is then plunged into the already bored hole at the feed rate Z 7 for pre positioning until the tooth has reached the set up clearance Ve on the underside of the workpiece i 4 The TNC then centers the tool again over the bore hole switches A Em on the spindle and the coolant and moves at the feed rate for A boring to the depth of bore 5 Ifa dwelltime is entered the tool will pause at the top of the bore hole and will then be retracted from the hole again Another oriented spindle stop is carried out and the tool is once again displaced by the off center distance 6 The TNC moves the tool at the pre positioning feed rate to the set up clearance and then if entered to the 2nd set up clearance at FMAX 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 i E G204 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 75 il 3 7 BACK BORING Cycle 204 DINISO G204 Please note while programming 76 Fixed Cycles Drilling il Cycle parameters 204 Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 Depth of counterbore Q249 incremental Distance between underside of workpiece and the top of the hole A positive s
380. the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the coordinates of the determined corner in the Q parameters listed below 6 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of corner in reference axis O 2 gt Z m T O E gt cc Lu cc O Q LL O Lu Y Q152 Actual value of corner in minor axis 16 9 DATUM HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 431 il G415 16 9 e PO INSIDE OF CORNER Cycle 415 DIN ISO Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The TNC always measures the first line in the direction of the minor axis of the working plane Cycle parameters 415 432 lst meas point 1st axis Q263 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 lst meas point 2nd axis Q264 absolute Coordinate of the first touch point in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 SETEURTOCHEROBE TH Spacing in 1st axis Q326 incremental Distance between the first and second measuring points in the reference axis of the working plane Input range O to 99999 9999 Spacing in 2nd axis 0327 inc
381. the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following Q parameters Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis 1152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q163 Deviation from diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle the less accurately the TNC can calculate the dimensions of the stud Minimum input value 5 470 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the stud in the reference axis of the working plane Input SET _UP TCHPROBE TP range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 p Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Center of the stud in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the diameter of the stud Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Start
382. to 359 999 End angle A axis 0412 absolute Ending angle in the A axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid A axis 0413 Angle of incidence in the A axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points A axis 0414 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the A axis If the input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Input range O to 12 Start angle B axis 0415 absolute Starting angle in the B axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle B axis 0416 absolute Ending angle in the B axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Angle of incid in B axis 0417 Angle of incidence in the B axis at which the other rotary axes are to be measured Input range 359 999 to 359 999 Number meas points B axis 0418 Number of probe measurements with which the TNC is to measure the B axis If the input value 0 the TNC does not measure the respective axis Input range O to 12 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement il Start angle C axis 0419 absolute Starting angle in the C axis at which the first measurement Is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359 999 End angle C axis 0420 absolute Ending angle in the C axis at which the last measurement is to be made Input range 359 999 to 359
383. to interlink various contours in a mathematical formula SPEC FCT CONTOUR POINT MACHINING CONTOUR DEF ISLAND Mas O Show the soft key row with special functions Select the menu for functions for contour and point machining Press the CONTOUR DEF soft key The TNC opens the dialog for entering the contour formula Enter the name of the first subcontour The first subcontour must always be the deepest pocket Confirm with the ENT key Specify via soft key whether the next subcontour is a pocket or an island Confirm with the ENT key Enter the name of the second subcontour Confirm with the ENT key If needed enter the depth of the second subcontour Confirm with the ENT key Carry on with the dialog as described above until you have entered all subcontours Always start the list of subcontours with the deepest pocket If the contour is defined as an island the TNC interprets the entered depth as the island height The entered value without an algebraic sign then refers to the workpiece top surface If the depth is entered as 0 then for pockets the depth defined in the Cycle 20 is effective Islands then rise up to the workpiece top surface Contour machining with SL Cycles The complete contour is machined with the SL Cycles 20 to 24 see Overview on page 171 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 9 2 SL ioe Simple Contour Formula il 9 2 SL cyclen Simple Contour Formula 226 Fixed Cycl
384. to the core diameter either tangentially from the center or with a pre positioning move to the side and follows a circular path Countersinking at front 5 6 7 The tool moves at the feed rate for pre positioning to the countersinking depth at front The TNC positions the tool without compensation from the center on a semicircle to the offset at front and then follows a circular path at the feed rate for countersinking The TNC then moves in a semicircle to the hole center Thread milling 8 9 The TNC moves the tool at the programmed feed rate for pre positioning to the starting plane for the thread The starting plane is determined from the thread pitch and the type of milling climb or up cut Then the tool moves tangentially on a helical path to the thread diameter and mills the thread with a 360 helical motion 10 After this the tool departs the contour tangentially and returns to the starting point in the working plane 11 At the end of the cycle the TNC retracts the tool at rapid traverse to the set up clearance or if programmed to the 2nd set up clearance 108 Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling il 9ZD osla 97 819AD ONDINISHALNNOO ONITIIA GVAYHL L r Please note while programming oa HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G263 4 7 THREAD MILLING COUNTERSINKING Cycle 263 so Cycle parameters 263 110 Nominal diameter 0335 Nominal thread diameter Input
385. tomatic Datum Setting il gt Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system Probe in TS axis 0381 Specify whether the TNC should also set the datum in the touch probe axis 0 Do not set datum in the touch probe axis 1 Set datum in the touch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Inpu
386. tool axis referenced to the machine coordinate system by entering tilt angles There are two ways to determine the position of the working plane Enter the position of the rotary axes directly Describe the position of the working plane using up to 3 rotations spatial angle of the fixed machine coordinate system The required spatial angle can be calculated by cutting a perpendicular line through the tilted working plane and considering It from the axis around which you wish to tilt With two spatial angles every tool position in space can be defined exactly therefore also all movements in the tilted system are Note that the position of the tilted coordinate system and dependent on your description of the tilted plane If you program the position of the working plane via spatial angles the TNC will calculate the required angle positions of the tilted axes automatically and will store these in the parameters Q120 A axis to Q122 C axis If two solutions are possible the TNC will choose the shorter path from the zero position of the rotary axes The axes are always rotated in the same sequence for calculating the tilt of the plane The TNC first rotates the A axis then the B axis and finally the C axis Cycle 19 becomes effective as soon as it is defined in the program As soon as you move an axis in the tilted system the compensation for this specific axis is activated You must move all axes to activate compensation for
387. touch point at the probing feed rate column F The TNC derives the probing direction automatically from the programmed starting angle 3 Then the touch probe moves in a circular arc either at measuring height or at clearance height to the next starting point 2 and probes the second touch point 4 The TNC positions the probe to starting point 3 and then to starting point 4 to probe the third and fourth touch points 5 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and saves the actual values and the deviations in the following O parameters _Parameternumber Meaning _ _ _ Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis 1152 Actual value of center in minor axis Q153 Actual value of diameter Q161 Deviation at center of reference axis Q162 Deviation at center of minor axis Q163 Deviation from diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis The smaller the angle the less accurately the TNC can calculate the hole dimensions Minimum input value 5 466 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il Cycle parameters a21 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Center of the o hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute value Center of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999
388. touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the second hole 2 4 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the second hole center 5 The touch probe returns to the clearance height and then to the position entered as center of the third hole 3 6 The TNC moves the touch probe to the entered measuring height and probes four points to find the third hole center 7 Finally the TNC returns the touch probe to the clearance height and processes the determined datum depending on the cycle parameters Q303 and Q305 see Saving the calculated datum on page 402 and saves the actual values in the Q parameters listed below 8 If desired the TNC subsequently measures the datum in the touch probe axis In a separate probing Q151 Actual value of center in reference axis Q152 Actual value of center in minor axis 0153 Actual value of bolt hole circle diameter HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G416 ov CIRCLE CENTER Cycle 416 DIN ISO il Please note while programming G416 tool call to define the touch probe axis Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a Cycle parameters Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the minor axis
389. tour they are also effective in the following subprograms but they need not be reset after the cycle call E Although the subprograms can contain coordinates in the spindle axis such coordinates are ignored m The working plane is defined in the first coordinate block of the subprogram You can define subcontours with various depths as needed Characteristics of the fixed cycles E The TNC automatically positions the tool to the set up clearance before a cycle E Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them E The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside corners this applies to the outermost pass in the Rough out and Side Finishing cycles The contour is approached on a tangential arc for side finishing E For floor finishing the tool again approaches the workpiece on a tangential arc for spindle axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X plane E The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling Complex Contour Formula The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and set up clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in Cycle 20 T O gt Q l Y 0 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 215 il Complex Contour Formula 9 1 SL Cycles Selecting a program with contour definitions With the SEL CONTOUR function you select a program
390. ts HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 1 Fundamentais Overviews using Fixed Cycles Fixed Cycles Drilling Fixed Cycles Tapping Thread Milling Fixed Cycles Pocket Milling Stud Milling Slot Milling xed Cycles Pattern Definitions Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket Fixed Cycles Cylindrical Surface Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula Fixed Cycles Multipass Milling cycles Coordinate Transformations Cycles Turning EE using Touch Probe Cycles Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measure ment of Workpiece Misalignment Special Functions Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum setting 10 uch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection Touch Probe Cycles Special Functions Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Kinematics Measurement uch Probe Cycles Automatic Tool Measurement 10 1 1 Introduction 38 1 2 Available Cycle Groups 39 Overview of fixed cycles 39 Overview of touch probe cycles 40 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 11 il 2 1 Working with Fixed Cycles 42 Machine specific cycles 42 Defining a cycle using soft keys 43 Defining a cycle using the GOTO function 43 Calling cycles 44 2 2 Pattern Definition PATTERN DEF 46 Application 46 Entering PATTERN DEF 47 Using PATTERN DEF 47 Defining individual machining positions 48 Defining a single row 49 Defining a single pattern 50 Defining individual
391. ty clearance do not permit pre positioning in the proximity of the touch points the TNC always starts probing from the center of the slot In this case the touch probe does not return to the clearance height between the two measuring points Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 408 aod 404 Center in 1st axis Q321 absolute Center of the slot in the reference axis of the working plane Input SET_UP TCHPROBE 1P range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the slot in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Width of slot 0311 incremental Width of the slot regardless of its position in the working plane Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Measuring axis 1 1st axis 2 2nd axis Q272 Axis in which the measurement is to be made 1 Reference axis measuring axis 2 Minor axis measuring axis Measuring height in the touch probe axis Q261 absolute Coordinate of the ball tip center touch point in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is to be made Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Set up clearance 0320 incremental Additional distance between measuring point and ball tip Q320 is added to SET_UP touch probe table Input range O to 99999 9999 Clearance height Q260 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which no collision between touch probe an
392. u to machine workpieces with any turning contours The contour description is in a subprogram You can use the cycle either for roughing finishing or complete machining Turning with roughing is contour parallel The cycle can be used for inside and outside machining If the starting point of the contour is larger than the end point of the contour the cycle runs outside machining If the starting point of the contour is less than the end point of the contour the cycle runs inside machining Roughing cycle run The TNC uses the tool position as cycle starting point when a cycle is called If the Z coordinate of the starting point is less than the contour Starting point the TNC positions the tool in the Z coordinate to set up clearance and begins the cycle there 1 The TNC runs a paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse The infeed value is calculated by the TNC with Q463 MAX CUTTING DEPTH 2 The TNC machines the area between the starting position and end point The cut is run contour parallel with the defined feed rate Q478 3 The TNC returns the tool at the defined feed rate back to the starting position in the X coordinate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the beginning of cut 5 The TNC repeats this process 1 to 4 until the final contour is completed 6 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle starting point 306 Cycles Turning il Finishing cycle run If the Z coo
393. uch probe axis gt Probe TS axis Coord 1st axis 0382 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the reference axis of the working plane at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if 0381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Probe TS axis Coord 2nd axis 0383 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the minor axis of the working plane at which point the datum Is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Probe TS axis Coord 3rd axis 0384 absolute Coordinate of the probe point in the touch probe axis at which point the datum is to be set in the touch probe axis Only effective if Q381 1 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt New datum in TS axis 0333 absolute Coordinate in the touch probe axis at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 m x D 3 O T e zA A Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il 16 3 DATUM RIDGE CENTER Cycle 409 DIN ISO G409 G409 Cycle run Touch Probe Cycle 409 finds the center of a ridge and defines its center as datum If desired the TNC can also enter the coordinates into a datum table or the preset table 1 The TNC positions the touch probe at rapid traverse value from FMAX column following the positioning logic see Executing touch prob
394. uitable position program a traversing block e g L Y 0 RO FMAX to the center of the turning spindle Use the cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE POSITION to orient the tool tip Cycle 800 aligns the workpiece coordinate system to the precession angle 0497 and correspondingly orients the tool tip The TNC orients the tool tip to the rotary table center for outer machining and in the opposite direction for inner machining With the precession angle 0497 you define at which position on the workpiece circumference machining should occur This may be necessary if you have to bring the tool into a specific position to machine a process due to reasons of space You can also rotate the machining position to better observe machining processes If you carry out inclined turning orient the precession angle of the tool tip and the coordinate system to a suitable position see User s Manual Turning chapter The turning cycles of the TNC can be used for inside and outside machining With Cycle 800 you can reverse the tool coordinate system REVERSE TOOL 0498 In this way you can use tools both for inside and outside machining The TNC then rotates the spindle by 180 and reverses tool orientation TO HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 800 13 2 ADAPT i il ITARY COORDINATE SYSTEM Cycle 800 O lt A lt N Effect With Cycle 800 ADAPT ROTARY COORDINATE SYSTEM the TNC aligns the workpiece coordinate syst
395. umber in table Q305 Enter the number in the datum or preset table in which the TNC is to save the coordinate If you enter O305 0 the TNC automatically sets the display so that the new datum is on the probed surface Input range 0 to 2999 New datum 0333 absolute Coordinate at which the TNC should set the datum Default setting 0 Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Measured value transfer 0 1 Q303 Specify whether the determined datum is to be saved in the datum table or in the preset table 1 Do not use See Saving the calculated datum on page 402 0 Write determined datum in the active datum table The reference system is the active workpiece coordinate system 1 Write determined datum in the preset table The reference system is the machine coordinate system REF system HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 Example NC blocks G419 6 13 DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO i H DATUM IN ONE AXIS Cycle 419 DIN ISO G419 Call tool O to define the touch probe axis Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Datum Setting il Center of circle X coordinate Center of circle Y coordinate Circle diameter Polar coordinate angle for 1st touch point Stepping angle for calculating the starting points 2 to 4 Coordinate in the touch probe axis in which the measurement is made Safety clearance in addition to SET_UP column Height in the touch probe axis at which the probe can traverse without collision
396. up clearance in the Z coordinate 1 The TNC runs the paraxial infeed motion at rapid traverse 2 The TNC finishes the finished part contour contour starting point to contour end point at the defined feed rate Q505 3 The TNC returns the tool to set up clearance at the defined feed rate 4 The TNC positions the tool back at rapid traverse to the cycle Starting point Please note while programming Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 Program a positioning block to a safe position with radius compensation R0 before the cycle call The tool position at cycle call cycle starting point affects the area to be machined Also refer to the fundamentals of turning cycles see page 286 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 13 6 TURN SHOULDE i il 13 6 TURN SHOULDER LONGITUDINAL EXTENDED Cycle 812 Cycle parameters Machining operation Q215 Define the machining operation 0 Roughing and finishing 1 Only roughing 2 Only finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance 0460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning Diameter at contour start 0491 X coordinate of the contour starting point diameter value Contour start in Z 0492 Z coordinate of the contour starting point diameter value Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of ENTREE the contour end point diameter value AdO I Contour
397. ust move out of the Hirth grid So remember to leave a large enough safety aly clearance to prevent any risk of collision between the LO touch probe and calibration sphere Also ensure that there qF is enough space to reach the safety clearance software g limit switch Define a retraction height 0408 greater than O if software option 2 M128 FUNCTION TCPM is not available If necessary the TNC rounds the calculated measuring positions so that they fit into the Hirth grid depending on the start angle end angle and number of measuring points Depending on the machine configuration the TNC cannot position the rotary axes automatically If this is the case you need a special M function from the machine tool builder enabling the TNC to move the rotary axes The machine tool builder must have entered the number of the M function in machine parameter mStrobeRotAxPos for this purpose The measuring positions are calculated from the start angle end angle and number of measurements for the respective axis and from the Hirth grid Example calculation of measuring positions for an A axis Start angle 0411 30 End angle 0412 90 Number of measuring points 0414 4 Hirth grid 3 Calculated stepping angle 0412 Q411 0414 1 Calculated stepping angle 90 30 4 1 120 3 40 Measuring position 1 0411 0 stepping angle 30 gt 30 Measuring position 2 0411 1 stepping angle 10 gt 9
398. ut The slot floor is approached tangentially HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle asagn iso b il G254 5 5 CIRCULAR SLOT Cycle 254 DIN ISO Please note while programming 144 With an inactive tool table you must always plunge vertically Q366 0 because you cannot define a plunging angle Pre position the tool in the machining plane with radius compensation R0 Define parameter Q367 reference for slot position appropriately The TNC automatically pre positions the tool in the tool axis Note parameter Q204 2nd set up clearance At the end of the cycle the TNC returns the tool to the starting point center of the pitch circle in the working plane Exception if you define a slot position not equal to 0 then the TNC only positions the tool in the tool axis to the 2nd set up clearance In these cases always program absolute traverse movements after the cycle call The algebraic sign for the cycle parameter DEPTH determines the working direction If you program DEPTH 0 the cycle will not be executed If the slot width is greater than twice the tool diameter the TNC roughs the slot correspondingly trom the inside out You can therefore mill any slots with small tools too The slot position O is not allowed if you use Cycle 254 Circular Slot in combination with Cycle 221 Danger of collision Use the machine parameter displayDepthErr to define whether if a positive depth is entered
399. vely FAUTO FU FZ Climb or up cut 0351 Type of milling operation with M3 1 climb milling 1 up cut milling gt Depth Q201 incremental Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of stud Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 gt Plunging depth Q202 incremental Infeed per cut Enter a value greater than 0 Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Feed rate for plunging Q206 Traversing speed of the tool while moving to depth in mm min Input range 0 to 99999 999 alternatively FMAX FAUTO FU FZ gt Set up clearance Q200 incremental Distance between tool tip and workpiece surface Input range O to 99999 9999 gt Workpiece surface coordinate Q203 absolute Absolute coordinate of the workpiece surface Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 2nd set up clearance Q204 incremental Coordinate in the spindle axis at which no collision between tool and workpiece fixtures can occur Input range O to 99999 9999 Path overlap factor Q370 Q370 x tool radius stepover factor k Input range 0 1 to 1 9999 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 m x D 3 pi D Z O za e o A 15 G256 5 6 RECTANGULAR STUD Cycle i G257 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle os MEIN ISO 5 7 CIRCULAR STUD Cycle 257 DIN ISO G257 Cycle run Use Cycle 257 to machine a circular stud If the diameter of the workpiece blank is greater than the maximum possible stepover then the TNC performs multiple stepovers u
400. viations in the following Q parameters Q151 Q152 Q153 Q161 Q162 Q163 Actual value of center in reference axis Actual value of center in minor axis Actual value of bolt hole circle diameter Deviation at center of reference axis Deviation at center of minor axis Deviation of bolt hole circle diameter Please note while programming Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle 430 only monitors for tool breakage there is no automatic tool compensation HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G430 k ne BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO i il G430 ee BOLT HOLE CIRCLE Cycle 430 DIN ISO Cycle parameters 430 aje Ba oo 492 Center in 1st axis Q273 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis Q274 absolute Bolt hole circle center nominal value in the minor axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Enter the bolt hole circle diameter Input range 0 to 99999 9999 Angle of 1st hole 0291 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the first hole center in the working plane Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 2nd hole 0292 absolute Polar coordinate angle of the second hole center in the working plane Inout range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Angle of 3rd hole 0293 absolute Polar coordinate an
401. while programming OVD OSI NI SOP 31949 Xy 3 94 BulzezoY Ag zu wuijesiy BIOIGIO NA 2 10 iesu dwo GL Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Measurement of Workpiece Misalignment il 394 Cycle parameters IS G405 a05 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the 6i hole in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute value Center of the hole in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position angle of the hole center Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the circular pocket or hole Enter a value that is more likely to be too small than too large Input range O to 99999 9999 t by Rotating the C Ax Cycle 405 DIN ISO Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 000 to 360 000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 12
402. with contour definitions from which the TNC takes the contour descriptions Show the soft key row with special functions FCT R Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining SEL Press the SEL CONTOUR soft key Enter the full name of the program with the contour definition and confirm with the END key 14 CONTOUR GEOMETRY is no longer necessary if you use SEL 6 Program a SEL CONTOUR block before the SL cycles Cycle CONTOUR Defining contour descriptions With the DECLARE CONTOUR function you enter in a program the path for programs from which the TNC draws the contour descriptions In addition you can select a separate depth for this contour description FCL 2 function Show the soft key row with special functions FCT conTouR Select the menu for functions for contour and point MACHINING machining DECLARE Press the DECLARE CONTOUR soft key Enter the number for the contour designator QC and confirm with the ENT key Enter the full name of the program with the contour description and confirm with the END key or if desired Define a separate depth for the selected contour With the entered contour designators QC you can include the various contours in the contour formula If you program separate depths for contours then you must assign a depth to all subcontours assign the depth O if necessary 216 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula
403. working plane ean 421 MEASURE HOLE Measuring the az Page 466 position and diameter of a hole KJ 422 MEASURE CIRCLE OUTSIDE a22 Page 470 Measuring the position and diameter of ei a circular stud 423 MEASURE RECTANGLE INSIDE a23 Page 474 Measuring the position length and eu width of a rectangular pocket 424 MEASURE RECTANGLE OUTSIDE Ma Page 478 Measuring the position length and width of a rectangular stud 425 MEASURE INSIDE WIDTH 2nd 425 Page 482 soft key row Measuring slot width By 426 MEASURE RIDGE WIDTH 2nd soft az Page 485 key row Measuring the width of a ridge Ms 427 MEASURE COORDINATE 2nd soft Mz Page 488 key row Measuring any coordinate ina a selectable axis 454 Touch Probe Cycles Automatic Workpiece Inspection il 430 MEASURE BOLT HOLE CIRCLE aso Page 491 2nd soft key row Measuring position and diameter of a bolt hole circle 431 MEASURE PLANE 2nd soft key a31 Page 495 row Measuring the A and B axis angles HA of a plane Recording the results of measurement For all cycles in which you automatically measure workpieces with the exception of Cycles 0 and 1 you can have the TNC record the measurement results In the respective probing cycle you can define if the TNC is to Save the measuring log to a file Interrupt program run and display the measuring log on the screen Create no measuring log If you want to save the measuring log to a file the TNC by default saves the data a
404. workpieces Workpiece touch probes TS 220 Signal transmission by cable TS 440 TS 444 Infrared transmission TS 640 TS 740 Infrared transmission e Workpiece alignment e Setting datums e Workpiece measurement Tool touch probes TT 140 Signal transmission by cable TT 449 Infrared transmission TL Contact free laser systems e Tool measurement e Wear monitoring e Tool breakage detection 892905 20 Ver00 SWO1 Printed in Germany 3 2012 F amp W
405. xamples are contour Pockets A and B overlap The TNC calculates the points of intersection S1 and S2 they do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles 218 Fixed Cycles Contour Pocket with Contour Formula il O O 5 5 or or f am f am oe oe 4 gt 4 gt N N Ke Ke O O 5 5 D D oO oO o 9 3 3 N Ke ge N 4 gt 4 gt or or wo gt Complex Contour Formula Area of inclusion Both areas A and B are to be machined including the overlapping area The areas A and B must be programmed in separate programs without radius compensation E In the contour formula the areas A and B are processed with the joined with function Contour definition program HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 T O gt Q l Y 0 i i Area of exclusion Area A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B The areas A and B must be entered in separate programs without radius compensation E In the contour formula the area B is subtracted from the area A with the without function Contour definition program Complex Contour Formula gt D D e 5 na D V D O ap e Only the area where A and B overlap is to be machined The areas covered by A or B alone are to be left unmachined The areas A and B must be entered in separate programs without
406. y the TNC can calculate the datum Minimum input value 5 Before a cycle definition you must have programmed a tool call to define the touch probe axis Cycle parameters 912 Center in 1st axis 0321 absolute Center of the pocket in the reference axis of the working plane Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Center in 2nd axis 0322 absolute Center of the pocket in the minor axis of the working plane If you program Q322 0 the TNC aligns the hole center to the positive Y axis If you program Q322 not equal to 0 then the TNC aligns the hole center to the nominal position Input range 99999 9999 to 99999 9999 Nominal diameter Q262 Approximate diameter of the circular pocket or hole Enter a value that is more likely to be too small than too large Input range O to 99999 9999 Starting angle 0325 absolute Angle between the reference axis of the working plane and the first touch point Input range 360 0000 to 360 0000 Stepping angle Q247 incremental Angle between two measuring points The algebraic sign of the stepping angle determines the direction of rotation negative clockwise in which the touch probe moves to the next measuring point If you wish to probe a circular arc instead of a complete circle then program the stepping angle to be less than 90 Input range 120 0000 to 120 0000 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 G412 16 6 a ee INSIDE OF CIRCLE Cycle 412 DIN ISO o il G412 16 6 INSIDE O
407. y finishing to finished dimension 3 Only finishing to oversize Set up clearance O460 incremental Distance for retraction and pre positioning gt Diameter at end of contour 0493 X coordinate of the contour end point diameter value gt Contour end in Z 0494 Z coordinate of the contour end point gt Maximum cutting depth 0463 Maximum infeed in axial direction The infeed is divided evenly to avoid abrasive cuts gt Roughing feed rate 0478 Feed rate during roughing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute Oversize in diameter 0483 Diameter oversize for the defined contour Oversize in Z 0484 Oversize for the defined contour in axial direction Finishing feed rate 0505 Feed rate during finishing If M136 has been programmed the value is interpreted by the TNC in millimeters per revolution without M136 in millimeters per minute 312 m X D 3 a D O T e zA A Cycles Turning il 13 12 TURN SHOULDER FACE EXTENDED Cycle 822 Application This cycle enables you to face turn shoulders Expanded scope of function You can insert a chamfer or curve at the contour start and contour end In the cycle you can define angles for the face and circumferential Surfaces You can insert a radius in the contour edge You can use the cycle either for roughing fi
408. ycle parameters 237 10 5 Programming Examples 240 20 11 1 Fundamentals 244 Overview 244 Effect of coordinate transformations 244 11 2 DATUM SHIFT Cycle 7 DIN ISO G54 245 Effect 245 Cycle parameters 245 11 8 DATUM SHIFT with Datum Tables Cycle 7 DIN ISO G53 246 Effect 246 Please note while programming 247 Cycle parameters 248 Selecting a datum table in the part program 248 Editing the datum table in the Programming and Editing mode of operation 249 Configuring the datum table 250 To exit a datum table 250 Status displays 250 11 4 DATUM SETTING Cycle 247 DIN ISO G247 251 EITOCT cass 251 Please note before programming 251 Cycle parameters 251 Status displays 251 11 5 MIRROR IMAGE Cycle 8 DIN ISO G28 252 Effect 252 Please note while programming 252 Cycle parameters 253 11 6 ROTATION Cycle 10 DIN ISO G73 254 Effect 254 Please note while programming 254 Cycle parameters 255 11 7 SCALING Cycle 11 DIN ISO G72 256 Effect 256 Cycle parameters 257 11 8 AXIS SPECIFIC SCALING Cycle 26 258 Effect 258 Please note while programming 258 Cycle parameters 259 HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 11 9 WORKING PLANE Cycle 19 DIN ISO G80 Software Option 1 260 Effect 260 Please note while programming
409. ycles for example DRILLING for the drilling cycles Select the desired cycle for example THREAD MILLING The TNC initiates the programming dialog and asks all required input values At the same time a graphic of the input parameters is displayed in the right screen window The parameter that is asked for in the dialog prompt Is highlighted Enter all parameters requested by the TNC and conclude each entry with the ENT key The TNC ends the dialog when all required data has been entered Defining a cycle using the GOTO function CYCL DEF 2 Us The soft key row shows the available groups of cycles The TNC opens the smartSelect selection window with an overview of the cycles Choose the desired cycle with the arrow keys or mouse The TNC then initiates the cycle dialog as described above Example NC blocks HEIDENHAIN TNC 640 TNC nc_prog PGM EX11 H O BEGIN PGM EX11 MM 1 ANY COMMENT 2 BLK FORM 0 1 Z X 135 Y 40 Z 5 3 BLK FORM 0 2 X 30 Y 40 Z 0 4 TOOL CALL 3 Z 1500 5 L Z 20 RO FMAX M3 SET UP CLEARANCE 5 DEPTH FEED RATE FOR PLNGNG PLUNGING DEPTH DWELL TIME AT TOP SURFACE COORDINATE 12ND SET UP CLEARANCE 7 L X 0 Y 0 RO FMAX M99 8 L X430 Y 0 RO FMAX M99 9 TOOL CALL 6 Z 3000 F2222 10 L 2420 RO FMAX M3 11 CYCL DEF 14 0 CONTOUR 12 CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL1 2 13 CYCL DEF 20 CONTOUR DATA 30 MILLING DEPTH L H OVERLAP ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR SURFACE COO

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Philips 6000 series Smart LED TV 32PFL6087T  freeman    Swingline V110E paper perforator  Novus CopySwinger 2  [ENG] – User Manual – S-Line 16GB  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file